K
Khách

Hãy nhập câu hỏi của bạn vào đây, nếu là tài khoản VIP, bạn sẽ được ưu tiên trả lời.

7 tháng 1 2022
Phải là what day is it today chứ
7 tháng 1 2022
Phải là what day is it today
7 tháng 1 2022


sân chơi gầm

7 tháng 1 2022

dưới lòng đất

TEST 1I. Choose the word in each group that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest. 1.  A. game                  B. geography               C. vegetable                D. change2. A. read                    B. teacher                    C. eat                          D. ahead3. A. tenth                   B. math                       C. brother                    D. theater4. A. engineer              B. between                  C. teeth                       D. greeting5....
Đọc tiếp

TEST 1

I. Choose the word in each group that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest.

1.  A. game                  B. geography               C. vegetable                D. change

2. A. read                    B. teacher                    C. eat                          D. ahead

3. A. tenth                   B. math                       C. brother                    D. theater

4. A. engineer              B. between                  C. teeth                       D. greeting

5. A. intersection         B. eraser                      C. bookstore                D. history

II. Circle the best answer among A, B, C, or D to complete the following sentences.(4ms)

1. Fall means …………… in British English

    A. Summer                          B. Winter                    C. Autumn                  D. Spring

2. What does Lien do when …………… warm?

    A. there’s                            B. it’s                          C. its                            D. they’re

3. It’s cold in our country….. the winter

    A. at                                    B. on                           C. of                            D. in

4. Tan likes …………… weather because he can go swimming.

    A. hot                                  B. cold                        C. windy                     D. foggy

5. How often do you do morning exercises in the morning?

    A. I sometimes do               B. Yes, I do                 C. I like it                    D. I play soccer

6. ……………….. straight across the road.

    A. Don’t run                        B. Not run                   C. No run                    D. Can’t run

7. I hope the ……….. can repair our car quickly.

    A. mechanic                        B. reporter                   C. architect                  D. dentist

8. The Bakers …….. dinner at the moment.

    A. is having                         B. are having               C. are eating                D. is eating

9. Look ………….. that strange man. He is looking ………LAN but she isn’t here.

    A. for, at                              B. at, for                      C. at, at                        D. at, on

10. Count ……. on   ………….one hundred, please.

    A. on , to                             B. to , on                     C. from , to                 D. at , to

III. Complete the sentences using the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. (3ms)

1.They (watch) their favorite TV programmes at the moment. ………………………………………

2.How much fruit that farmer (produce) every year?  ……………………………………….………..

3.We mustn’t (waste) too much power.  ………………………………………………………………

4.He (buy) a new house next month? ………………………………………………….………………

5.The Nile River is the longest river in the world and it (flow) to the Mediteranian Sea.  ……………

IV.  Use the correct form of the words in brackets to complete sentences . (3ms)

1. Don’t make a fire here. It’s very ………………..………                                                 danger

2. Air …………………….…. is a big problem in many cities in the world.                        pollute

3. There are a lot of …………………….. mountains in Viet Nam.                                      beauty

4. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ……………………….?                                                     nation

5. We must be …………………………….. when we cross the road                                    care

V. Read the passage and choose the correct answer to fill in the gap.  (4ms)

            I live in a house near the sea. It is  (1) old house, about 100 years old and (2) very small. There are two  bedrooms upstairs. (3) no bathroom. The bathroom is down stairs (4) the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden (5) the house. The garden (6) down to the beach and in spring and summer (7) flowers every where. I like alone (8) my dog, Reck , but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with (9). I love my house for (10) reasons the garden, the flowers in summer, the weather in fall, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.

  1. A. a                             B. an                            C. the                          D. any
  2. A. It’s                          B. It                             C. There’s                    D. They’re
  3. A. and                         B. or                            C. but                          D. too
  4. A. between                  B. next                        C. near to                    D. next to
  5. A. in front                   B. front of                   C. of front in               D. in front of
  6. A. go                           B. going                      C. goes                        D. in goes
  7. A. there is                    B. they are                   C. there are                  D. those are
  8. A. for                          B. of                            C. on                           D. with
  9. A. me                          B. I                              C. my                          D. I’m
  10. A. a                             B. any                          C. many                       D. a lot

VI. Rewrite the sentences so that it has the same meaning as the sentence printed before.  (4ms)

  1. My room is smaller than your room.

è Your room is …………………………………………

  1. Mr. Hung drives very carefully.

è Mr. Hung is ………………………………………………………

  1. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?

è Are …………………………………………………………….?

  1. Does your father cycle to work?

è Does your father get ……………………………?

  1. How much does a box of chocolates cost?

è What …………………………………………………?

 

 

TEST 2

Question I: Choose the best answer to fill in each blank.(3 ms )

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s ........................... home.

A. go

B. to go

C. going

D. goes

2. Tuan and I ..................... badminton in the yard.

A. playing

B. is playing

C. are playing

D. am playing

3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ........................... go straight ahead.

A. can

B. don’t can

C. must

D. must not

4. They are going to New York ........................... plane.

A. in

B. by

C. with

D. on

5. Viet is ............................ something on his book.

A. writing

B. writting

C. wrote

D. writes

6. Are there ................... stores on your street?

A. a

B. an

C. any

D. the

7. My sister and I ............................. television in the living - room now.

A. am watching

B. are watching

C. is watching

D. watching

8. ........................... do you go to school? - I walk.

A. How

B. By what

C. How many

D. How by

9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” - “No, ........................”

A. she not plays

B. she don’t

C. she isn’t

D. she doesn’t

10. How many floors .......................... in your school?

A. there are

B. there has

C. are there

D. have there

Question II: Give the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets.(3ms )

 

1. Every evening my father (watch) ............................. television.

2. We (not/ read) ............................. books after lunch.

3. Tom (be) ........................ my friend. He (play) ...................... sports everyday.

4. (your students/ play) ................................................. soccer every afternoon?

5. Where (your children/ be)? - They’re upstairs. They (play) video games.

6. What ……you( do) ............................ now? - I (unload) ........................... the vegetables.

7. (Nam/ work) in the garden at the moment?

Question III: Fill in each blank with the suitable word.( 3 ms )

Today is Sunday. ........................ (1) is fine and warm. Mr. Kien’s family are ....................(2) at home. They are working in the house now. Mr. Kien is cleaning the doors and  windows. Nam is helping .................... (3). Mrs. Oanh and Hoa ..................... (4) in the kitchen. Mrs. Oanh is ....................... (5) the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables. They are cooking the lunch. They are going to ........................ (6) a good lunch together.

Mr. Kien’ family are not free today. They are busy ........................ (7) the housework, but they are very happy. They are going to finish the housework at half past eleven, then .........................(8) will have lunch. In the afternoon they are going to the park. In the ......................(9) Nam and Hoa are going to ................(10) all their exercises before going to bed.

Question IV: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group. (1 m )

 

1. A. gray

B. face

C. orange

D. make

2. A. do

B. brother

C. two

D. to

3. A. has

B. name

C. family

D. lamp

4. A. son

B. come

C. home

D. mother

5. A. house

B. our

C. four

D. about

Question V: Make the question for the underlined words or phrases.(3 ms )

1. She walks to school every day.

...................................................................................................................................?

2. We are having bread and milk for breakfast.

...................................................................................................................................?

3. There are ten boys and nineteen girls in our class.

...................................................................................................................................?

4. My brother gets up at a quarter to six.

...................................................................................................................................?

5. They are traveling to work by car.

...................................................................................................................................?

Question VI: Use the given words to make complete sentences.(4ms)

1. Minh/ live/ brother/ apartment/ town.

...............................................................................................................................................

2. Mrs. Lan/ and/ children/ travel/ London/ plane.

...............................................................................................................................................

3. There/ be/ any flowers/ your/ school/ yard?

...............................................................................................................................................

4. He/ not ride/ home/ but/ go/ taxi.

...............................................................................................................................................

5. Sister/ have/ bike/ and/ cycle/ work/ everyday.

...............................................................................................................................................

Question VII: Read the following passage and answer the questions below.(3ms)

Linda is a vegetarian so she doesn’t eat meat. She doesn’t have a big breakfast every morning. She usually has a slide of bread and a glass of milk. She has lunch at the office at about 11.30. She has only rice with vegetables for lunch. At weekends she often goes to a Chinese restaurant because there is a lot of delicious food for vegetarians.

* Question:

1. Why doesn’t Linda eat meat?

...............................................................................................................................................

2. What does Linda usually have for breakfast?

...............................................................................................................................................

3. What does she have for lunch?

...............................................................................................................................................

4. Where does she have lunch?

...............................................................................................................................................

5. Why does she often go to a Chinese restaurant at weekends?

...............................................................................................................................................

 

TEST 3

I/ Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the others:(20points)

1

A.game

B.geography

C.vegetable

D. change

2

A.read

B.teacher

C.eat

D. ahead

3

A.tenth

B.math

C.brother

D. theater

4

A.engineer

B.between

C.teeth

D. greeting

5

A.intersection

B.eraser    

C.bookstore

D. history

6

A.plays

B.says

C.days

D. stays

7

A.watches

B.brushes

C.classes

D. lives

8

A.their

B.math

C.thing

D. theater

9

A.station

B.intersection

C.question

D. invitation

10

A.teacher

B.children

C.lunch

D. school

11. A. call                    B. fall                          C. shall                        D. wall

12. A. clown               B. down                      C. own                        D. town

13. A. above                B. glove                       C. love                         D. move

14. A. cow                  B. show                       C. know                      D. throw

15. A. clear                  B. dear                        C. hear                         D. pear

16. A. thank                B. that                         C. this                          D. those

17. A. cost                   B. most                        C. post                         D. roast          

18. A. arm                   B. charm                      C. farm                        D. warm

19. A. come                 B. home                       C. some                       D. none

 20. A. cow                 B. now                        C. how                        D. show

VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

II Choose the best answer to fill each blank(30 points)

1.      It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s……..home.

            A. go               B. to go                                   C. going                      D. goes

2.      Tuan and I……..badminton in the yard.

            A. playing       B. is playing                            C. are playing              D. am playing

3.      This sign says “stop!”. We ……..go straight ahead.

A. can              B. don’t can                            C. must                        D. must not

4.      They are going to New York……..plane.

A. in                B. by                                       C. with                        D. writes

5.      Nam is ……..something on his book.

A. writing        B. written                                C. wrote                      D. writes

6.      Are there……..stores on your street?

A. a                 B. an                                        C. any                          D. the

7.      My sister and I……..television in the living room now.

A. am watching           B. are watching           C. is watching             D. watching

8.      ……..do you go to school? – I go there on foot.

A. how                        B. by what                  C. how many               D. how by

9.      “Does Tom play volleyball?”  - “No, …..”

A. she not plays           B. she don’t                C. she isn’t                  D. she doesn’t

10.  How many floors …….in your school?

A. there are                 B. there has                 C. are there                  D. have there

11 The city is noisy, but the country is ………….

a. silent                        b. quiet                        c. peace                       d. busy

12 In my bedroom, there are ..................... pictures on the wall.

a. a                               b. any                          c. much                       d. some

13. My father is tall, but my brother is ………….

a. tall               b. taller                                    c. tallest                       d. the tallest

14 Mom: Would you ……. noodles? Yes, please.

a.  want                       b. like                          c. has                           d. have

15. Ba’s house is near my house. He is my ……………

a.  brother                    b. classmate                 c. neighbor                  d. friend

16 I often help my brother ............. his homework.

a. of                             b. for                           c. with                         d. from

17 Anna is talking ...................  Annie.

a.  to                            b. with                         c. of                             d. on

18. They ……… go out at weekend. They stay at home.

a. always                     b. usually                     c. sometimes               d. never

19. Is there ………….. else you want?

a. a                               b. an                            c. anything                  d. something

20. Does Mrs. Van ………….. one kilo of sugar.

a. need                         b. needs                       c. to need                    d. needing

21. My brother is 1.68 m ...................

            . short                          b. tall                           c. taller                                    d. shorter

22. What time .................. the class start?      At seven o’clock.

a. do                            b. is                              c. are                           d. does

23. You and .................. are the same height.

a. me                           b. my                           c. I                               d. Mine

24 How ............... is it from your house to the market?

a. fast                           b. far                            c. long                         d. much

25. Don't ........... up late!

a. stay                          b. stays                        c. to stay                      d. staying

26 Lan is ………… aerobics.

a. do                            b. doing                       c. play                         d. playing

27 What about …………… to the movies?  - Yes. That’s good idea.

a.  go                           b. going                       c. to go                        d. goes

28 My brother ……………… a shower after school.

a.  have                        b. has                           c. washes                    d. take

29. Tam: ……….. is behind your house?       Nam: There is a big rice paddy.

a. Which                      b. What                       c. When                       d. Where

30. He wants ………………. an engineer

a. be                             b. to be                        c. being                       d. to being

III Fill in each blank with the suitable given word.(10 points)

   There are four (1)…… in a year. (2)….. are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the (3)……., the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold (4)…. not very cold. There are (5)…. flowers in the spring. In the summer, the day is long and the night is (6)…. People often (7)… swimming in this season. The fall is the season (8)… fruits. In the (9)…, it is usually very cold. The day is  short and the (10)…. is long.

1.

A.

weather

B.

seasons

C.

activities

D.

months

2.

A.

It

B.

What

C.

They

D.

The

3.

A.

summer

B.

autumn

C.

fall

D.

spring

4.

A.

but

B.

and

C.

in

D.

too

5.

A.

many

B.

much

C.

two

D.

lots

6.

A.

long

B.

short

C.

fat

D.

tall

7.

A.

go

B.

do

C.

play

D.

skip

8.

A.

on

B.

of

C.

at

D.

in

9.

A.

summer

B.

fall

C.

winter

D.

spring

10.

A.

afternoon

B.

morning

C.

dinner

D.

night

IV/Give the correct form of the verbs(10points)

1)Tuan and his brother (not watch)……… …TV at the moment. They (be)………asleep.

2)My father always (come)…………….home late. He (finish)………….work at 5 o’clock.

3)I (not understand)………………………this sentence. What…… this word (mean)……

4)Right now I (look)……..…..around the classroom. Minh (write)…………..…in her book.

5)Lien’s friend (have)……..a new bike but he (not like)…………..it very much.

VFill in the blanks with a/an/the if necessary.( 10 points)

1)There is……egg on………. …table.

2)My yard doesn’t have……………..trees.

3)Is your mother staying at…………….…home?

  -Yes.She’s in……………..kitchen.

4)My sister is……….…nurse. She goes to……….work everyday.

5)Are there………….….hotels in your street?

6)Our city has ……………...university and …….……..ancient temple.

VI Read the passage then answer the questions.(5 points)

This is my friend. Her name is Linh. She goes to school from Monday to Saturday. Her school is on Nguyen Cao street and it’s big. It has five floors. Linh’s classroom is on the 3rd floor. Linh is in class 6A. There are thirty-two students in her class.

Linh starts her classesat 2 o’clock in the afternoon and finishes them at 4.30. On Monday she has Math, Literature and English. After school Linh plays badminton,  but her friend, Lien doesn’t play it; she plays volleyball. Linh goes home at 5.30.

1)Where/Linh’s school?.................................................................................................

2)How many/floor/school/have? .....................................................................................

3)Which/class/Linh?

4)What time/Linh/start/classes? ........................................................................................

5)Lien/play/badminton? .....................................................................................................

VII/Find the mistakes and correct them.(15 points)

1)Mr Hien isn’t live in a house in the country.

             A    B            C                 D

2)The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.

       A        B                 C                               D

3)There aren’t a trees to the left of Lan’s house.

      A               B              C                D

4)That’s my sister over there. She stands near the window.

      A                           B                   C              D

5)Do you know how many teachers does your school have?

   A                      B                   C                     D

6.He wants any books on that shelf.

                    A     B      C           D

7 How many teachers there are in your school?

              A           B        C           D

8 They no get up at 6 o’clock.

              A     B     C         D

9. Her garden is big. It’s a garden big.

               A      B         C           D

10. Sorry. You can't speak to Jim now. He's have a bath.

                            A             B                           C       D

11. We go to the library in Monday afternoon.

            A  B                    C            D

12. Mr. Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.

                        A            B          C    D

13 She’d likes a glass of water.

          A      B   C                  D

14. What is the higher mountain in the world?

               A          B            C       D

15I would like some potatos.

     A    B    C                  D

VIII. /Rewrite these sentences with the same meaning(5 points)

1)Mr Binh is going to England by plane. (FLYING)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

2)The stadium is behind the park. (FRONT)                  

à……………………………………………………………………………..

3)Mrs Khanh has a daughter, Nguyet. (MOTHER)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

4)Are there five rooms in Nhung’s house? (HAVE)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

5)My father rides his motorbike to work every day. (BY)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

IX. Give the correct form of the word( 15 points)

1.      There are four……………….in my house (BOOKSHELF).                             

2.      The photocopy is between the ……………….and the drugstore (BAKE).

3.      Is your brother an…………………? (ACT).

4.      Mai’s sister is a……………    ……(SING).

5.      We must be ………………   …when we cross the road (CARE).

6.      This tree has a lot of green ……………     ……(LEAF).

7.      Is your father a………………     …(BUSINESS).

8.      I’m Vietnamese. What’s your………………    …?(NATION).

9.      Air ………………    …is a big problem in many cities in the world (POLLUTE).

10.  Yoko is from Japan. She is ………………       …(JAPAN).

11 Mary likes attending the English .............................................. contests. (SPEAK)

12 My neighborhood is ..................................... for good and cheap restaurants. (FAME)

13 I like the city life because there are many kinds of ....................................... (ENTERTAIN)

14 Lan’s classroom is on the ......................................... floor. (TWO)

15 These children like ........................................ weather. (SUN)

 

 

TEST 4

ĐỀ THI HỌC SINH GIỎI CẤP TRƯỜNG

Năm học 2009- 2010

Môn thi: Tiếng Anh lớp 6

(Thời gian làm bài: 60 phút - không kể lúc giao đề)

 

I. Circle the word that has the underlined letter pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. doctor

b. come

c. brother

d. mother

2. a. he

b. she

c. evening

d. seven

3. a. children

b. ten

c. pen

d. twelve

4. a. morning

b. night

c. evening

d. greeting

5. a. name

b. waste

c. are

d. eraser

II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences

1………………….book is this, yours or mine?

a. What

b. Who

c. Whose

d. Which

2. I………….for school.

a. am never late

b. never am late

c. am late never

d. late am never

3. Don’t forget to put the……………….in the waste- basket.

a. milk bottles

b. bottle milk

c. bottles

d. milks bottles

4. His job is………….

a. driving a bus

b. a bus driver

c. to driver bus

d. bus driving

5. What about…………………..to dinner with me?

a. coming

b. to come

c. come

d. comes

6. This car is different……….mine.

a. with

b. to

c. for

d. from

7. …………present the price of this book is ten thousand dong.

a. At

b. On

c. In

d. For

8. He is only ten, but he eats………………….his father does.

a. much than

b. more than

c. as much as

d. as much than

9. Don’t …………….slowly.

a. walk

b. walks

c. to walk

d. walking

10. ………….books are on the table.

a. There

b. Their

c. They

d. Theirs

11. My friend is going to visit Dalat…………the fifth of May.i

a. on

b. at

c. in

d. to

12. I don’t want……….milk today.

a. any

b. some

c. many

d. no

13. ……..you angry with him?

a. Do

b. Why

c. How

d. Are

14. Hanoi is …………….of Vietnam.

a. capital

b. a capital

c. an capital

d. the capital

15. She is very patient. I think she is a very good…………

a. doer

b. player

c. actor

d. doctor

III. Choose the suitable word from a, b, c, or d to complete the gaps.

1. see           eye

Eat…………..

A. ear

B. face

C. mouth

D. food

2. dark          light

Small……….

A. big

B. bright

C. thin

D. little

3. bring         take

Arrive………..

A. leave

B. carry

C. catch

D. come

4. head           top

Foot………….

A. shoe

B. down

C. bottom

D. under

5. hurry          late

Eat………….

A. hungry

B. thirsty

C. tired

D. full

 

IV. Put a word into the gaps of the passage.

Hoang likes fishing very much. He (1)……….in the river (2)……..….our house (3)………….Sunday afternoon, when he (4)…………no work, he goes down to the river with a little seat and (5)…………..sandwiches and fishes until it is quite dark.  (6)………..are always a (7)………….other people there. They love fishing, too and they all sit there quietly for hours. Sometimes they catch some fish, (8)…………they do not. I (9)…………not like that kind of sports (10)………...I am not patient (kiên nhẫn).

 

V. Arrange these words to make a grammartically meaningful sentences.

1. house/ a/ Hoa/ lake/ near/ a/ lives/ Mrs/ in.

………………………………………………………………………….

2. Lan/empty/bottles/ cans/ and/ collects/ them/ recycles/ and

……………………………………………………………………………

3. are/ to/ going/ we/ Hue/ this/ vacation/ visit/ summer/

…………………………………………………………………………

4. cold/ they/ when/ often/ volleyball/ it/ play/ is/ do?

…………………………………………………………………

5. a/ I/ sandwich/ glass/ lemon/ like/ of/ would/ juice/ a/ and

……………………………………………………………………….

 

VI. Put the verb in a correct tense

1. Now they (watch)……………………… TV in their bedroom.

2. Tomorrow the boys (have)………………… a picnic by the bank.

3. Phong (like)…………….. (jog) …………………..very much.

4. …………Kien (go)……………………. to school at 6.45 in the morning?

 

VII. Put a, an, the, any into the gaps

1. Do you live in……………apartment in town? - No. We live in………..house in………country.

2. There aren’t …………...two star hotels in Thai hoa Twon.

3. Is there………….vegetable garden in front of ……….yard?

4. What’s that? – It’s ……….eraser.

5. Are there………….lakes in your city?

6. Near ………...river, there is …………paddy field.

 

 

 

TEST 5

ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT HỌC SINH GIỎI

 NĂM HỌC 2010 -2011
MÔN: Tiếng Anh 6

 

A. Pronunciation.
 Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the others.
1. A. call                     B. fall                          C. shall                        D. wall
2. A. clown                 B. down                      C. own                         D. town
3. A. above                  B. glove                       C. love                         D. move
4. A. cow                     B. show                       C. know                       D. throw
5. A. clear                   B. dear                         C. hear                         D. pear
6. A. thank                  B. that                         C. this                          D. those
7. A. cost                     B. most                        C. post                         D. roast
8. A. arm                     B. charm                     C. farm                        D. warm
9. A. come                   B. home                       C. some                       D. none
10. A. cow                   B. now                         C. how                         D. show
B. Vocabulary & grammar.
I. Choose the best answer.

1. His lips aren’t full. They are ………………….. ( fat, weak, thin, long)
2. Lemonade, apple juice, soda and ……………. are cold drinks ( beans, noodles, vegetables, iced tea)
3. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it ………….. a week ( once, twice, two times, three times)
4. Lan and Nam often listen to music in …………. free time. ( your, his, her, their)
5. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer. She …………. plays soccer. ( always, usually, never, often)
6. He wants ………..…. an engineer. ( to be, being, be, is)
7. They would like some milk …………… dinner. ( in, at, for, of)
8. Minh often goes …………. in the mountains on the weekend. ( walking, travel, walk, to walk)
9. She listens to music ……..…….. a week ( two days, always, twice, every )
10. ………………. I help you? Yes. I’d like some beef. ( Do, Am, Would, Can)
II. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the verb in brackets.
1. My sister always (wear) nice clothes for work. Today she (wear)........... a blue jacket and shirt
2. Why you (buy).............. so much food ?    - Because we ( have) ..............a party tonight,
3. That film ( come)............... to the local cinema next week. You ( want)............ to see it?
4. It ( not rain ) ..........right now. The sun ( shine )................ and the sky is blue.
5. Alice ( not take) .................the bus to school every day. She usually ( walk).......... instead
III. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in brackets.
1. There are four ………… in my house.                                                       bookshelf.
2. The photocopy is between the ………… and the drugstore.                     bake
3. Is your brother an……………..?                                                                act
4. Mai's sister is a ………………..                                                                 sing
5. We must be …………….. when we cross the road.                                  care
6. This tree has a lot of green ……………….                                               leaf
7. Is your father a ………………. ?                                                               business
8. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your …………… ?                                             nation
9. Air ....... is a big problem in many cities in the world.                               pollute
10. Yoko is from Japan. She is ………………                                              Japan
IV. Find and correct the mistakes.
1. My mother is going to the market with my
2. Mr. Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.
3. How many homework does Lan have every day?
4. The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.
5. I'm twenty-one year old and I' m a student.
6. A lot of my friends play soccer, but not much of them play tennis.
7. Minh and his father are going to plant trees in the garden now.
8. Are they many students in your class?
C. Reading.
I. Complete the passage. Fill in each gap with a suitable word given
.

finishes   /   are    /   students    /    has    /    big    /    in    /    yard   /   grade    /    on    /    street

Here is a photo of my school. It’s a ……(1)…. school. It is …..(2) … the city. It’s on Nguyen Hue   …..(3)… . In my school, there is a big ...(4) … and there ….(5) ….. a lot of trees around it. My  school …….(6) …. three floors and forty classrooms with 1,700 ….(7) …. My classroom is ….(8)…. the second floor. I’m in …..(9) …… 6, class 6A. Our class starts at 7.00 and …..(10) …… at 11.30

II. Read the passage and then fill True(T) or False(F) for each sentence below.

            It’s six o’clock in the evening. Many people are at home. They are having dinner. They are watching T.V. They are listening to music. But Mrs. Bich is going to the work. She’s a doctor and she works at night in the hospital. Today she’s late. The hospital is not in her neighborhood so she usually goes by car. Mrs. Bich is in her car now. She’s driving fast. She should slow down but she must be at work by six thirty. A policeman stops her. “ You are driving too fast !” he says. You are going to have an accident. It’s six thirty. Mrs. Bich is not at the hospital. She’s at the police station. Her car must stay there for fourteen days.

1. Many people are not working 6. She is late for work
2. Mrs. Bich comes home every evening at six 7. She is a dangerous driver
3. Mrs. Bich is a night doctor 8. A policeman doesn’t keep her car
4. The hospital is near her house 9. She arrives at the hospital at 6.30
5. She goes to work by motorbike 10. She isn’t going to drive her car for two weeks
III. Read the passage and answer the questions.
Salina lives in a village in Africa. Her day starts at 4 o’clock. She gets up, and she walks three kilometers to the river. She collects some water, and carries it back to her house. The water is very heavy. It isn’t clean but there isn’t any water in the village. Salina doesn’t go to school. She can’t read or write. She helps her mother in the house.
• Questions:
1. Where does Salina live?
2. What does Salina do after she gets up?
3. Is the water clean?
4. Can Salina read?
5. Where does Salina help her mother?
6. What does she collect?
7. Does Salina go to school?
8. Is the water very heavy?
D. Writing.
I. Rearrange the following sentences into meaningful sentences.

1. newspaper / a / day / I / read / every.

2. Lunch / a / grandfather / after / always / sleep / has.

3. famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.

4. listen / I / the / my / car / radio / usually / in / to.

  ……………………………………………………………….

5. face / eyes / big / Lan / round / black / a / and / has.

  …………………………………………………………………

6. there / house / many / of / your / how / cans / are / food / in ?

  ………………………………………………………………..
II. Rewrite each of the following sentences, beginning with the words given
1. Does your class have twenty-five students?
    Are there..........................................?
2. How much does a bowl of noodles cost?
    How much is....................................?
3. The work is very hard and he can’t do it.
    This work is too................................
4. Mr. Minh has a daughter, Lan .
    Mr. Minh is .......................................
5. What is the width of this river?
    How............................................... ..?
6. My mother often drives to work.
    My mother often goes ....................
7. What is the price of a cake and an orange?
    How............................................... ..?
8. That book belongs to Nam.
   That is........................................

 

 

TEST 6

 NĂM HỌC 2010 -2011
MÔN: Tiếng Anh 6

Section a : phonetics

 I.  Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others 

1. A.    brush               B. music                      C. truck                       D. bus.

2. A. lettuce                 B. tube                         C. music                      D. student

3. A. plays                   B. says                         C. days                        D. stays.

4. A. tents                   B. books                      C. lamps                      D. windows

5. A. watches             B. lives.                       C. brushes                   D. classes    .                                                                                                                                                               6. A. station                 B .pollution                 C. question                  D. intersection

7. A. teacher                B. children                  C.  lunch                      D. school.

8. A. arm                     B. park                        C. farm                        D. warm

9. A. come                   B. home                       C. some                       D. love

10. A. know                B. now                        C. how                        D. shower

     Section b : vocabulary and grammar

 I.  Choose the word or phrase which best completes each sentence  

  1. What about…………..a cup of coffee?

A. have                        B. having                     C. you have                 D. do you

  1. Let’s …………….to the movies.

A. goes                                    B. go               C. to go                       D. going

  1. ……..does she go jogging? - Once a week.

A. How often              B. How long                C. How about              D. How

  1. He …….to the movie.

A. goes often              B. often goes               C. go often                  D. is often

  1. Tuan and I……..badminton in the yard.

       A. playing       B. is playing                            C. are playing              D. am playing

6.       This sign says “stop!”. We ……..go straight ahead.

     A. can                     B. don’t can                      C. must                        D. must not

7.       Nam is ……..something on his book.

     A. writing         B. written                                C. write                       D. writes

8.       Are there……..stores on your street?

     A. much                       B. a lot                  C. any                           D. some 

9.       - ……..do you go to school?   – I go there on foot.

    A. How                  B. By what                          C. How many              D. How by

10.   How many classrooms …………..in your school?

    A. there are                    B. are there                      C.    there has                      D. have there

II Each sentece has a mistake. Find and correct it

1. I always clean my tooth after every meal .

…………………………………………………….

2.  Most people doesn’t work on Sunday.

……………………………………………………

3. Mr. Lan doesn’t lives in Vietnam .

…………………………………………………..

4. What time are your classes start ?

…………………………………………………….

5. Mai morning begins very late.

……………………………………………

6. Do you go to school in Monday?

…………………………………………………

7. Ba often does his homeworks in the evening.

……………………………………………………………..

8. When this movie finish?

………………………………………………………………………..

9. One of my friends have two eggs and some bread for breakfast.

……………………………………………………………………………….

10. Would you like an apple or any oranges ?

………………………………………………………………………

III. Give the correct forms of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentences below.

1.  Ba usually ( listen) ……… to the teacher in class, but he ( not listen ) …     ………..now .

2.  Where is your mother?- She( be) … . in the bathroom. She (brush) … ….  ……..his teeth.

3……..your children( go ) … …to school by bus every day?

4.  She (ride) ………………… her bike to school now.

5.  Oh, no! It (rain) ................... We can’t play tennis. It always (rain) ............. a lot in April.

6. - What ………your son usally (have) ................for breakfast?

- He usually (eat) .................. a carrot and (drink) ................. a glass of cold water.

7. - What ……..your mother ( do ) ……………………..this summer vacation?                                             - She (visit)............. ………………………my grandparents in Vinh city.

8.  He (not ,go)......................... to  the movies on Sunday nights.

9.  Look! She (come).................................our classroom.

10.  What (be) ………..there (drink) ............................for dinner?

11.  What … …..Mr. Allen (do) … ……….? - He (be) …….. a teacher.

12.  Can we (play) … ………..soccer on the streets?

 

Section c : reading

 

I.                   Read the text and choose the best answer to complete each sentences below.

                                                           My house

            I live in a house near the sea. It is ...(1)... old house, about 100 years old and...(2)... very small. There are two bed rooms upstairs...(3)... no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs ... (4)... the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden...(5)... the house. The garden...(6)... down to the beach and in spring and summer...(7)... flowers every where. I like alone...(8)... my dog, Reck, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with...(9)...

I love my house for... (10)... reasons the garden, the flowers in summer, the fier in winter, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.

1.

A. a

B. an

C. the

D. any

2.

A. It's

B. It

C. there's

D. They're

3.

A. and

B. or

C. but

D. too

4.

A. between

B. next

C. near to

D. next to

5.

A. in front

B. front of

C. of front in

D. in front of

6.

A. go

B. going

C. goes

D. to go

7.

A. there are

B. they are

C. these are

D. those are

8.

A. for

B. of

C. on

D. with

9.

A. me

B. I

C. my

D. I'm

10.

A. a

B. any

C. many

D. a lot

 

II.  Fill in each gap with one suitable word in the following passage.

I have a  very close friend. Her name is Mai. She is eleven years old __(1)__ she is in grade six. She__(2)__ speak English. She has English __(3)__ Tuesday, Thursday and Friday. She can also __(4)__ the piano. In her room, __(5)__ is a piano and some books. Every day she gets up at six. She __(6)__ breakfast at six thirty and goes to school at a __ (7)__ to seven. She has her __(8)__ from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she __(9)__back home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now and Nga is in her room. She __(10)__ doing her homework.

 

Section d  : writing 

  I.Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.

1. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms ?

     Are ……………………………………….........................?

2. Mr Minh has a son, Trung.                                                

      Mr Minh ...................................

3. Huyen walks to school every morning.                 

     Huyen goes .........................................................

4. The girls are beautiful.

     They’re ………………………………………………….

5. My father usually drives to work.

     My father usually goes …………………………………………

6. How much is a bowl of noodles ?

    How much does.....................................................................................

7. They are Hoa and Hai.

    Their……………………………………………………..

8. I like beef and vegetables.

    Beef …………………………………………..

9. The bookstore is to the right of the museum.

    The museum………………………………………………

10. We have English class at 7.15.

      Our English class……………………………………..

 

 II.Write a passage (about 80 – 100 words) telling about your plan in this summer vacation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 7

ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT HỌC SINH GIỎI

NĂM HỌC 2010 - 2011

MÔN : Tiếng Anh  Lớp 6

 

I. Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently in each word group below

1. A. lunch                  B. bench                     C. couch                     D. chemistry

2. A. bank                   B. stadium                  C. factory                   D. math

3. A. museum             B. unload                    C. bus                         D. truck

4. A. accident             B. travel                      C. ahead                     D. bank

5. A. books                 B. radios                     C. cameras                  D. teachers

 

II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the following sentences:

1. The toy store is .................... the bookstore and the drugstore.

A. on                           B. in                            C. of                            D. between

2. The road sign says “ No walking”. We .................... walk here.

A. not can                    B. not must                  C. mustnt                   D. arent

3. My father is an ..................... . He works in a factory.

A. doctor                     B. engineer                  C. teacher                    D. farmer

4. I see some people at the bus – stop. Are they ......................... for the bus?

A. waiting                   B. to wait                    C. wait                        D. waits.

5. My grandparents live in the countryside ................. my aunt.

A. on                           B. of                            C. at                            D. with

6. Please go and ............................. a bath.

A. wash                       B. make                       C. have                        D. do

7. She has ....................................................

A. black long hair       B. hair black long        C. long black hair        D. black hair long

8. My father always goes .................... a walk in the early morning.

A. to                            B. on                           C. in                            D. for

9. This student is very good ............................ Math.

A. at                            B. in                            C. with                        D. to

10. It isnt very far so we want to go ...................... foot.

A. at                            B. with                        C. to                            D. on

11. Im just going to ................. a photo of the town square.

A. take                        B. make                       C. paint                       D. draw

12. I .................. German quite well, but my wife cant.

A. am speaking           B. can                          C. can speak                D. know speak

13. ........................... likes John. He is very popular.

A. Everyone                B. All people               C. Nobody                  D. Anyone

14. You must be ................. at the intersection.

A. care                         B. careful                    C. careless                   D. caring

15. Listen! The news on the radio .................. very interesting.

A. are                          B. has                          C. is                             D. am.

16. He always feels ..................... in the morning.

A. sleeping                  B. sleepy                     C. sleep                       D. asleep

17. What about ................. to the cinema by bike ?

A. to go                       B. is going                   C. go                           D. going

18. It is a very important meeting. You .................................... late.

A. mustnt be               B. mustnt                   C. mustnt goes           D. mustnt go

19. David and Jim often listen to music in ....................... free time.

            A. your                        B. his                           C. her                          D. their

20. John often ........................ in the river in the fall.

            A. go shopping            B. go camping             C. goes fishing            D. go jogging

 

III. Supply the correct tense or form of the verb in brackets

1. Be quiet ! The baby (sleep).....................................................

2. It ( rain) ........... very much in the summer. It ( not rain)................. now.

3. I see that you (wear) ................ your best clothes.

4. My mother (cook)........... some food in the kitchen at present. She always (cook)......... in the morning.

5. She ( not want)............... to answer the phone because she (do)............... the cooking.

6. What about (go)................... to the zoo this Sunday?                    – Good idea!

7. This sign says “No left turn”. You mustnt (turn)..........................left.

 

IV. Read the passage and choose the best answer for each question

Jane is a gymnast. She is very pretty. She is tall and thin. She is light but she isnt weak. She has physical strength. She has an oval and lovely face. She has long black hair and brown eyes. She has a small mouth. Her teeth are also small and white. Everybody loves her because she always helps the others.

1. What does Jane do ?

A. teacher                          B. gymnast                C. doctor                D. dentist

2. Whats she like ?

A. tall and slim                  B. tall and thick        C. tall and fat          D. tall and short

3. She is ....................................

A. light and weak             B. light but strong      C. thin and weak     D. tall and weak

4. What color are her eyes ?

A. black                            B. grey                       C. light                    D. brown

5. Everybody loves her because ......................................................

A. she always helps the others                           B. she always asks the others for help

C. she is tall, thin and strong                              D. she is beautiful.

 

V. Give the correct form of the word in capital letters given to complete the sentences

1. Im looking for a .....................................gift for an old lady.                                SUIT

2. This coffee is too ................................... to drink.                                                  HEAT

3. Do you know what the ........................ of the river ? .                                           DEEP

4. There is a ................................... of fruits in Vietnam                                            VARY

5. This river is the ...................... river in Vietnam.                                                   LONG

6. My mother goes .......................... twice a week.                                                    SHOP

7. They are learning ......................... because they will go to Berlin next year         GERMANY

8. In math I am ............................... than you.                                                            BAD

9. His brother is strong and ...................................                                                     GOOD-LOOK

10. In the library we read about ....................... things.                                              WONDER   

 

VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one,beginning with the given words or phrases

1. How about going to the zoo?

Lets ………………………………………………………………………………………..

2. How much are these shoes?

How much do …………………………………………………………………………….?

3. Close your book, please!

Dont ……………………………………………………………………………………....

4. The Nile River is longer than the Mekong River

The Mekong River................ ……………………………………………………………

5. We have a lot of work to do.

There is................ …………………………………………………………………………

6. You have six children

You have a big ........ ………………………………………………………………………

7. On the table are 2 cups of tea

There are …………………………………………………………………………………

8. He often flies to Bangkok

He often goes ……………………………………………………………………………

9. Our house is far from the school.

Our house is not ………………………………………………………………………….

10. How many oranges do you want ?

How many oranges would......…………………………………………………………… ?

 

VII. Each of the following sentences has a mistake. Underline the mistake and correct it

1. Can you to go to the market for me ?                                             1…………………………

2. My son is so good on mathematics.                                                2…………………………

3. I am knowing all of them.                                                               3…………………………

4. How many butter would you like ?.                                               4…………………………

5. Mary often has a glass of milk and some bread at breakfast          5……………..................

6. We dont have homeworks today                                                   6………………………..

7. They have a cup of tea at the moment.                                           7. ....................................

8. I would like buying a packet of tea and a tube of toothpaste.        8.....................................

9. Mai always helps her mother in the housework.                            9......................................

10. He is listen to music now.                                                             10....................................

 

VIII. Fill in each numbered blank with ONE suitable word to complete the passage

I……(1)........ a big breakfast, but on weekdays I dont have time to cook,…….. (2).......... I have to go to work. So I just have ………(3).........  toast and two cups of tea. I have …….(4).......... at about one oclock. I usually go to the pub …….(5).......... some of my friends. I have a hamburger and French fries or something like that. But I dont usually drink ……..(6)......... beer or wine. I …..(7)........... work in the afternoon if I drink alcohol at …….(8)........., so I drink water or lemonade. I have dinner at about seven oclock. I dont like …….(9).........., so I usually buy something on the way home – a pizza, fish and chips, or some Chinese food. ……..(10)............ dinner I usually go to the pub and have a few pints of beer.

IX. Write a paragraph tell about your school ( about 80 – 100 word) ( Viết một đoạn văn kể về trường học của bạn. Khoảng 80 đến 100 từ - 15 điểm)

 

 

 

TEST 8

Part I. In this part of the test you must choose the word or phrase of words which best completes each of the following sentences . The first sentence has been done for you as an example .( 10ms )

00. We shouldn’t _____ trash on the street .

A. throwing                 B. to throw                              C. throws                                D. throw

01. Lemonade , apple juice , soda and ______ are cold drinks .

A. beans                      B. noodles                               C. vegetables               D. iced tea

02. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday . We have it _____ a week .

A. once                        B. twice                                   C. two times                            D. three times

03. Ngoc and Yen often do aerobic in ____ free time .

A. your                        B. his                                       C. her                                      D. their

04. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer . She ____ plays soccer .

A. always                    B. usually                                C. never                                   D. often

05. He wants ____ an engineer .

A. to be                       B. being                                   C. be                                        D. is

06. They would like some milk _____ dinner .

A. in                            B. at                                        C. for                                       D. of

07. Minh often goes _____ in the mountain on the weekend .

A. walking                  B. walks                                  C. walk                                    D. to walk

08. My father is _____ man .

A. a old                       B. an old                                 C. not young                           D. not very young

09. I’m tired . I’d like ______ .

A. sit down                 B. sitting down                       C. to sit down             D. to sitting down

10. Do you have any toothpaste ? I’d like a large _____ .

A. tube            B. roll                                      C. bar                                      D. tin

Your Answer .

Qs

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

An

D

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Part II. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in bracket . The first sentence has been done for you as an example . ( 10 ms )

00. She is a _______ .                                                                                     ( teach )

01. There are four ______ in my house .                                                                    ( bookshelf )

02. The photocopy store is between the _____ and the drugstore .                           ( bake )

03. Is your brother an _____ ?                                                                                    ( act )

04. Mai’s sister is a _____ .                                                                                        ( sing )

05. We must be _____ when we cross the road .                                                       ( care )

06. This tree has a lot of green _____ .                                                                      ( leaf )

07. Is his father a ______ .                                                                                         ( business )

08. I’m Vietnamese . What’s your ______ ?                                                              ( nation )

09. Air _____ is a big problem in many cities in the world .                                     ( pollute )

10. Yoko is from Japan . She is ______ .                                                                   ( Japan )

Part III. Read the passage and choose (A,B,C,D) that best answers each of the questions about it(30ms)

My name is Petty  and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice. For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s  at  about 1.30 .

We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday we often go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.

   1/ Petty and her husband work in 

       A/offices                B/factories                       C/ hospitals                    D/ clinics

   2/Petty and Phil have

       A/a big breakfast                                B/    a light  breakfast           

      C/ breakfast with meat                        D/   breakfast with eggs                 

   3/ What do they have for lunch  ?

A/ salad and sandwich                        B /salad and soup

C /fish  and soup                                 D/ sandwich and fish 

   4/What do they drink for dinner  ?

      A/iced tea                           B/ iced coffee           C/ soda                       D/   orange juice

  5/ What time do they usually have dinner ?

      A/6.30                                 B/7.15                  C /7.30 .                        D/ 8.00

  6/ Where  do they have dinner on Saturday evenings ?

A/at home                                          B/at a hotel

           C /at their friend’s house                   D/ at a restaurant 

PartIV. Fill each of the numbered blanks in the passage . Use only one word for each space .(10ms)

listen               Mondays       teach                have              my

movie              on                    lunch                usually           small

I live in  a   …(1)…. house in Hanoi .I ….(2)……..English at a school there .I usually ….(3)…….. breakfast at seven o’clock in the morning  and I have ……..(4)…. ……at twelve o’clock in  the canteen of the school. I teach ……(5)……students in the morning . I teach them dialogues ..(6)…. Wednesdays and Fridays .On …….. ….(7)… I teach them grammar .In the evening I …8)…. stay at home and  …(9)… to the radio . I sometimes go to the ……(10)…. .I always go to bed at ten o’clock

Part V. Complete the passage and answer the questions (15ms).

 

winter              are                  night     In       but                                                   

cold                 seasons            are                  go         

There are four (1) ……. in a year. They  …(2)……. spring, summer, fall and ..…(3)…  . In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold …(4)….not very cold. There …(5)……..many flowers in the spring.  ……(6)….. the summer, the day is long and the night is short .People often ..(7)…….swimming in this season. The fall is the season of fruits. In the winter, it’s usually very  ……(8)……. The day is short and the ………(9)………is long .

  1. How many seasons are there in a year ?

...............................................................................

  1. What are they ?

......................................................................................

  1. Is it usually warm in the spring ?

...............................................................................

  1. What are there in the spring ?

....................................................................................

  1. What do people often do in the summer ?

..........................................................................

  1. Is the day long or short in the summer ?

............................................................................

 Part VI.Read the  passage and check T/F (10ms)

                Hello! My name is Phong. I’m twelve years old and I’m in grade 6. My school is in the country. It’s a small school. My school has two floors and sixteen classrooms. My classroom is on the first floor. There are thirty five students in my class. Every morning I get up at six o’clock. I get dressed, brush my teeth and wash my face. I have breakfast at six twenty and go to school at six forty.

  1. Phong is twelve years old .                
  2. Phong’s school is in the city              
  3. There are sixty classrooms in Phong’s school  .
  4. Phong’s classroom  is on the second floor .
  5. His class has 53 students .                 
  6. He has breakfast at 6.30                     

7.   He is  in grade 6

8.   Phong’s school is small

9.   Phong brushes his teeth at 6.20

10. He goes to school at 6.40

PartVII. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it has the similar meaning to the first .(30ms)

1.This school is big  .

 ->It …………………. .

2. She goes to school on foot .

->She…………………………..

3. There are four rooms  in my house .

->My house  …………………………..

4. I go to school at six thirty

.->I go to school ……………………….

5.She likes noodles  .

->Her favorite …………………………….

6. The movie  theater  is  in front of  the hotel .

->The hotel ……………………………….

Part VIII. Putting the words in the correct order to make  the meaningful  sentences.(25ms)

  1. father / his /time /does /often / what /free /your /in /do ?

…………………………………………………………………..

  1. sports / play /the /which /he /weekend /does /on ?

………………………………………………………………….

  1. your / drink / brother’s /what / favorite /is ?

………………………………………………………………

  1. small / think /sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has .

………………………………………………………………

  1. an/ the / city / apartment / in / we / in /live

………………………………………………………………

Part  IX.Write a paragraph about Jane using the given cues  .(20ms)

            Jane / gymnast .She/pretty .She/ tall /thin .She /light /but she  / not/week .She /oval /lovely face .She /long /black /hair /brown eyes .She/ small mouth .Her teeth /small / white .Everyone /love her because she/ always help/ others .

           

 

TEST 9

 THI KHẢO SÁT HỌC SINH GIỎI LẦN 2

MÔN TIẾNG ANH 6

Thời gian làm bài 120 phút không kể thời gian phát đề

 

 

 

 ( Đề thi gồm 4 trang thí sinh làm bài vào đề thi này)

I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.( 1 điểm)

1.         A hats                          B pens                         C cats                          D books          

2.         A bus                           B museum                   C drug                        D lunch                      

3.         A heavy                       B leave                       C head                         D ready                      

4.         A fly                           B hungry                     C usually                     D early           

5.         A brother                     B these                        C thank                       D that             

6.         A door                         B book                        C look                         D cook           

7.         A read                         B teacher                     C near                          D eat               

8.         A face                          B small                        C grade                        D late             

9.         A  twice                       B swim                        C skip                          D picnic                      

10.       A arm                          B charm                       C farm                         D warm                      

II. Chọn phương án đúng nhất điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau.(3 điểm)

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s________ home.

A. go                           B. to go                       C. going                      D. goes

2. Tuan and I________ badminton in the yard.

A. playing                   B. is playing                C. are playing  D. am playing

3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ________ go straight ahead.

A. can                          B. don’t can                C. must                        D. must not

4. They are going to New York ________  plane.

A. in                            B. by                           C. with            D. on

5. Viet is ________ something on his book.

A. writing                    B. writting                   C. wrote                      D. writes

6. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any                          D. the

7. My sister and I ________  television in the living room now.

A. am watching           B. are watching           C. is watching D. watching

8. ________ do you go to school? .  I walk.

A. How                       B. By what                  C. How many  D. How by

9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” .  “No, ________”

A. she not plays           B. she don’t                C. she isn’t                  D. she doesn’t

10. How many floors ________ in your school?

A. there are                 B. there has                 C. are there                  D. have there

11. She is not doing __________ in the garden, just walking about.

A. anything                 B. nothing                   C. something   D. one thing

12. It is twelve o’clock, Mai Anh. Let’s ________ home

A. goes                        B. to go                       C. going                      D. go

13. These are my note books, and those are ________

A. you             B. your                        C. yours                       D. your’s

14. Nam usually goes ________ after school.

A. to fishing                B. home                       C. the cinema D. house

15. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any              D. the

16. ________do you get there? – We walk, of course.

A. Why                       B. What                       C. How by                   D. How

17. What time ________ on television?

A. is the news B. are the news           C. is news                    D. are news

18. I am very tired. .  ________.

A. Me too                    B. for me the same      C. Also me                  D. I also

19. Don’t be late ________ your school.

A. on                           B. at                             C. to                            D. for

20. I don’t want much sugar in my coffee. Just _______ please.

A. little                        B. a little                     C. few             D. a few

21. ________ is that? ~ It’s a pencil.

A. How many B. How                        C. Who                        D. What

22. Is this an ________?

A. ruler                        B. book                       C. eraser                      D. pen

23. I am  ________, so I don’t want to eat any more.

            A. hungry                    B. thirsty                     C. full                          D. small

24. ________do you work?   .  I work at a school.

            A. What                      B. Where                     C. When                      D. How

25. I’m going to the ________now. I want to buy some bread.

            A. post office              B. drugstore                C. bakery                     D. toystore

26. Is this her ________?

            A. erasers                    B. books                      C. an eraser                 D. eraser

27. The opposite of “weak” is ________.

            A. thin             B. small                       C. strong                     D. heavy

28.  She doesn’t have ________friends at school.

            A. a                             B. some                       C. many                       D. much

29.  ________long or short?

            A. Does Mai have hair                                    B. Is Mai’s hair

            C. Does Mai’s hair have                                 D. Is hair of Mai

30. I need  a large ________of toothpaste.

            A. bar                          B. can                          C. tube            D. box

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc(2 điểm)

a.       I (1 - not like)  …………… coffee very much.

b.      Mrs. Nga (2 - be) ……………  a doctor. She (3 - work) …………… in a hospital.

c.       Lan (4 - visit)……………  Hue this summer vacation.

d.      What you (5 - do) ……………  now? ~ I (6 - do) …………… my home work

e.       There (7 - be) …………… some milk in the fridge.

f.        Look! The plane is flying  towards the airport. It (8 - land)……………

g.      My father (9 - watch) …………… TV in the living room. He often (10 - watch) …………… TV in the evening.

IV. Sử dụng từ loại đúng của các từ cho sẵn để hoàn thành câu(2 điểm)

1.      It’s very …………… in the city.                                                  (noise)

2.      There is a …………… next to my house.                                    (bake)

3.      She is a …………… of English.                                                  (teach)

4.      I brush my …………… twice a day.                                            (tooth)

5.      Long goes …………… at the weekend.                                      (sail)

6.      Their house is on the …………… floor of the building. (five)

7.      Thai Binh is …………… than Hanoi.                              ( small)

8.      Do you …………… play video games?.                         (usual)

9.      This is the …………… house in my village.                          (old)

10.  Peter ……………… a very big truck.                                          (driver)

V. Điền vào chỗ trống bằng 1 giới từ thích hợp( 1 điểm)

a.       There are trees (1)…………… my house.

b.      Lee is Chinese. He is (2)…………… China.

c.       She lives (3)…………… Hanoi (4)…………… her aunt and uncle.

d.      The cat is not on the table. It’s (5)…………… the table.

e.       I often listen (6)…………… music (7)…………… my free time.

f.        Can I help you? ~ I’d like a tube (8)…………… tooth paste.

g.      We go to school (9)…………… the morning.

h.      Jane often goes to work (10)…………… bus.

VI. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau( 2 điểm)

1.      Thuy goes to school by bus.

 

2.      I am in grade 6.

 

3.      There are four people in his family.

 

4.      Her eyes are brown.

 

5.      It is cool and nice in the fall in my country.

 

6.      They are going to school.

 

7.      Mrs. Trang feels very tired.

8.      Those are peas and beans.

9.      An ice – cream is 4,000 dong.

10.  Marie speaks French.

VII. §iền vào chỗ trống với 1 mạo từ a, an hoặc the vào chỗ trống các câu không cần thì để nguyên

a.       I’d like (1)…………… dozen eggs, pleased.

b.      Math is my favorite (2)…………… subject.

c.       We live in (3)…………… apartment in town.

d.      I want to travel all over (4)…………… world.

e.       His father sometimes goes to (5)……………  work (6)…………… foot.

f.        Can I have (7)…………… apple?

g.      (8)…………… People don’t like him because he is selfish.

h.      Nam is (9)…………… artist. He has (10)…………… studio.

VIII.  Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi( 2 điểm)

1.      My school has over 25 classrooms.

There                                                                         my school.

2.      Miss White’s face is oval. It is small.

Miss White

3.      Jane goes to school on foot.

Jane

4.      What food do you like?.

                                                     favorite

5.      He gets up at five fifteen.

He ………………………….. past

6.      I brush my teeth after breakfast, lunch and dinner.

I                                                                        a day.

7.      What does he do?

                                     job?

8.      Why don’t we go to Dam Sen Park?

What about

9.      The bookstore is to the right of the restaurant

The restaurant is

10.  Carol doesn’t live far from her office.

Carol lives

IX. Tìm 10 lỗi sai trong đoạn văn sau (2 điểm) (tính theo từng dòng)

Miss Lien live in a small house on Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually is breakfast in seven in the morning and she has dinner at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches his students in the morning. She teaches them dialogue on Wednesday to Friday. On Mondays, she teach them grammar. In the evening, she usually stay at home and listens books. She sometimes goes to the movies theater. She always go to bed at ten o’clock.

X. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống (1 điểm)

I have a very close friend. Her name is Nga. She is twelve years old (1) …………… she is in grade six. She (2) …………… speak English. She has English (3) …………… Tuesday and Friday. She can also (4) …………… the piano. In her room, (5) …………… is a piano and some books. Everyday she gets up at six. She (6) …………… breakfast at 6.30 and goes to  school at a (7) …………… to seven. She has her (8) …………… from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she (9) …………… home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now. Nga is in her room. She is (10) …………… the piano.

XI. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa (1 điểm)

1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.

……………………………………………………………………………………………

2. a / plays   / badminton / Paul / week / twice.

……………………………………………………………………………………………

3. like / the / weather / fall/ what / is / the / in?

……………………………………………………………………………………………

4. building / tallest / in / this / my city / the / is.                                                                                                  

……………………………………………………………………………………………

5. good / the/ there /let’s / and/ time / beach / go / have / to / a.

……………………………………………………………………………………………

6. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has.

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

7. hot / when / I/ go swimming / it / is.

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

8. camping / often / do / how / you / go?

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………

10. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world/ river.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 10

I. Tìm một từ không cùng nhóm với các từ còn lại (1đ)

1. A.month                  B.seventh                    C.ninth                        D.eighth

2.A.geography             B. housework              C.math                        D.English

3.A.read                      B. watch                      C.book                        D.write

4.A.listening               B.working                   C. playing                   D.morning

II. Viết từ trái nghĩa của những từ sau đây  (1đ)

5.black

6.long

7.heavy

8.hungry

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ( 2 đ)

9.Trang usually (listen ) ………to the teacher in the class .

10. Nam (look ) ……………… out of the window at the moment.

11.Where’s your father ? He (be)…………..in the bathroom.

12…………your children (go)…………..to school by bus everyday?

13.There ( be) ………many flowers in our garden.

14.Every day Mr.Hung (not drive) …………….to work.

15. What is Mai ( do) ………….now?

16.We are tired and we’d like ( sit) …….down.

IV. Mỗi câu sau có một lỗi sai , hãy sửa lại cho đúng(1,5 đ)

17.How much rice and how many beef do you want?

18.She’d like a dozen eggs and any vegetables.

19.Can you to go to the supermarket for me ,Hoa ?

20.We need eight hundred gram of beef.

21.What would you like buying at the canteen ?

22.There is a apple on the table.

V. Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại sau đây ( 3 đ)

Lien : Hello, Mai (23)………………………………………..everyday ?

Mai : I get up at a quarter to six

Lien : (24) …………………………………………………..morning ?

Mai : I play badminton.

Lien : (25)…………………………………………………..half past six ?

Mai : No, I don’t. I go to school at six thirty.

Lien : (26)…………………………………………………..today ?

Mai : No, we don’t. We have history on Tuesday and Saturday.

Lien : So (27)………………………………………………………………?

Mai : We have English, geography and math.

Lien : (28)……………………………………………………go jogging ?

Mai : I always go jogging .

 

VI. Đọc đoạn văn sau rồi trả lời các câu hỏi bên dưới ( 1,5đ)

Hello, I’m Trung.This is my school. It is small and old but it is beautiful .Behind the school , there is a large yard. After school in the afternoon we often play soccer there.The yard is clean and there are many trees and flowers. My friends and I sit under these trees every morning to review our lessons. My school has two floors and fifteen classrooms.My classroom is on the first floor. There are forty - three teachers in my school. They are good teachers. I love them and I love my school very much.

Questions :

29. Is Trung’s school big ?

30. What is there behind Trung’s school ?

31. What do Trung and his friends often play after school ?

32. Where do Trung and his friends sit every morning to review their lessons

33. Does his school have two floors ?

34. How many teachers are there in his school ?

VII. Điền một từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống ( 3 đ)

Today is Sunday. (35)……. is fine and warm.Mr Kien’s family are (36)……………at home.They are working in the house now.Mr Kien is cleaning the doors and windows.Nam is helping (37)……………....Mrs Oanh and Hoa (38) …………….in the kitchen.Mrs Oanh is (39) ……….the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables.They are cooking the lunch. They are going to (40) ……….a good lunch together.

VIII. Sắp xếp những từ sau thành câu có nghĩa ( 2đ)

41. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has .

42. Brown’s / round / Mrs / or / is / oval / face ?

43. coffee / aren’t / some / but / there / is / any / apples / there / iced.

44. like / I / wouldn’t / because / bread / not / I’m / hungry.

45. your / drink / brother’s / what / favorite / is ?

46. a / is / Lan’s house / garden / there / big / behind.

47. Ho Chi Minh City / Mrs Oanh / do / family / to / how / and / travel / her ?

48. walking / their / moutain / go / the / they / house / often / in / near.

IX. Dùng từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh ( 2,5 đ)

49. Mrs Hue / children / eating / breakfast / foodstall.

50. your / brother / play / volleyball / yard / now ?

51. Mr / Mrs Thu / travel / work / car / everyday.

52. Nam / friends / go / school / now .

53. Every / afternoon / school / Ba / housework / and / listen / music.

X. Dùng từ gợi ý ở đầu câu thứ hai viết lại câu thứ nhất sao cho nghĩa không thay đổi ( 2,5 đ) .

54. The garden is behind Nam’s classroom.

Nam’s classroom ……………………………………………………………………..

55.Tom drives to work every morning .

Tom travels …………………………………………………………………………..

56.There are four people in her family

Her family …………………………………………………………………………….

57. He goes to work at seven fifteen.

He goes to work at a ………………………………………………………………….

58.This box has twelve packets of tea.

There …………………… ……………………………………………………………..

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 11

Question I.  Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others 

1. A.    brush               B. music                      C. truck                       D. bus.

2. A. lettuce                 B. tube                         C. music                      D. student

3. A. plays                   B. says                         C. days                        D. stays.

4. A. tents                   B. books                      C. lamps                      D. windows

5. A. watches             B. lives.                       C. brushes                   D. classes    .                                                                                                                                                               6. A. station                 B .pollution                 C. question                  D. intersection

7. A. teacher                B. children                  C.  lunch                      D. school.

8. A. arm                     B. park                        C. farm                        D. warm

9. A. come                   B. home                       C. some                       D. love

10. A. know                B. now                        C. how                        D. shower

 

Question II. Vòng tròn chữ cái A, B, C hoặc D thay cho từ em cho là đúng nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau đây (1.0 điểm)

1. 

2. My friends ………………. English on Monday and Friday.

            A. not have                 B. isn’t have                C. don’t have              D. doesn’t have

3. I am  ……….., so I don’t want to eat any more.

            A. hungry                    B. thirsty                     C. full                          D. small

4. Is this her …………………?

            A. erasers                    B. books                      C. an eraser                 D. eraser

5.  ………………… long or short?

            A. Does Mai have hair                                    B. Is Mai’s hair

            C. Does Mai’s hair have                                 D. Is hair of Mai

6. It's seven thirty and Minh is late…………….. school.

           A. for                           B. at                             C. to                            D. in

Question III. Hãy  tìm từ thích hợp để hoàn thành các câu sau (1.0 điểm)

1. Mrs Lan is a nurse and her husband is a doctor. They both work in the ________

2. Nga is very thirsty. She wants something to _________.

3. There are many cars ____________ on our roads nowadays.

4. There is a store ________to the restaurant

5. We never go _____________ because we don't have a tent.

6. A :   How ____________ do you go jogging ?- Once a week.

7.  A :  What would you like __________ breakfast?

     B :  I’d like a sandwich and a glass of  milk.

8.  A :  What do you like?

     B:   I like beef. It’s my _____________ food.

Question IV. Mỗi câu sau có ít nhất một lỗi sai. Gạch dưới lỗi sai và viết lại toàn bộ câu đúng (1.0 điểm)

 0. He  don’t like coffee.

            He  doesn’t like coffee.

 

1. We live in 50 Le Hong Phong street

  ...................................................................................................................................

2. Would you like go to the cinema tonight?               

        ..…….………………………………………………………………………………

 3. I’m the younger person in my family.      

………………………………………………………………………………………                       

 4. She’s my friend. She’s from French.        

………………………………………………………………………………………                       

 5. How height is the Petronas Twin Towers?                       

………………………………………………………………………………………

6. In the free time, Hoa often listens to music, goes fishing and play video games.

....................................................................................................................................

7. A:  How many homework does he have?

B:  He has a lot of homework.

.......................................................................................................................

………………………………………………………………………………………

8. How long does Mr Ba travel to work?  _  He travels to work by car.

   .................................................................................................................................

Question V. Điền vào chỗ  trống MỘT từ thích hợp để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau (1.0 điểm)

     This (1)……… Smith’s room. You can see, his room is not very large. (2)………. are two chairs, a table, a bed, a wardrobe (3)……….. a bookshelf in his room. The table is near (4) ……….. window. There is (5) ....... ink- pot, some books and (6) ………  English- Vietnamese dictionary on the table. The bed is on the right. There are also  some books and newspapers on the bed. The wardrobe is opposite the bed. Smith has  many clothes. (7) ………. clothes are all in the wardrobe. The bookshelf is (8)…….. the wall. There are many (9)………. on it.        

Question VI. Đọc đoạn văn và làm các bài tập dưới đây (1.0 điểm)

     Manchester has a population of about five million but it’s not the capital city of Britain. London is the capital and it’s the biggest city in Britain. But Manchester is the wettest! In Manchester, it rains in spring, summer, fall and winter. The city is very noisy. There are a lot of cars and there is a lot of pollution. People drive their cars to work and children take bus to school. There aren’t many bikes or motorbikes because the weather is very cold. Near the city , there are  lots of lakes and mountains. People go walking there on the weekend. Manchester also has a lot of cinemas and theatres so there is always something to do on the weekend .

  1. Đọc kỹ các câu sau và viết T (True) vào câu em cho là đúng và F(false) vào câu sai  so với đoạn văn trên.

Ví dụ: Manchester has a population of about five million.             T              

1. Manchester is the capital city of Britain.                   ______

2. Manchester is very quiet.                                     ______

3. Children go to school by bus in Manchester              ______

4. There are a lot of cinemas and theatres in Manchester        ______

  1. Dưạ vào đon văn trên tr li các câu hi sau :

1. Is Manchester bigger than London ?........................................................

2. What’s the weather like in winter in Manchester ?.................................

3. How do people go to work ?.......................................................................

4. What do people do on the weekend ?.........................................................

Question VII. Sắp xếp lại các câu sau thành đoạn hội thoại (câu cuối cùng đã được làm) (1.0 điểm)

a.   Yes. I need some eggs.

b.   A kilo, please.

c.    How much do you want ?

d.    A kilo . Do you want any thing else ?

e.    A dozen please. Thank you. Good bye.

f.    How many do you want ?

g.    I’d like some sugar .

h.    Can I help you ?

i.    Good bye

1.____ , 2. ____ , 3. ____ , 4. ____ , 5. ____ , 6. ____ , 7. ____ , 8. ____ , 9.   i

Question VIII. Hãy cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc dể hoàn thành mỗi câu sau (2.0 điểm)

        0. She ...... a student (be)                   She is a student

1. She is very..................................                                  (beauty).

2. Mai’s sister is a ..................... .                                     (sing)

3. Her …………….. are small and white.                        (tooth)

4. Is your father a ....................?                                       (farm)

5. It’s very.................... in the city.                                   (noise)

6. Our .................... are in the bookstore.                         (child)

7. Dont go straight a head. Its very.......................          (danger)                                  

Question IX. Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa của câu không thay đổi.

1. Does your class have twenty-five students?
    Are there..........................................?
2. How much does a bowl of noodles cost?
    How much is....................................?
3. The work is very hard and he can’t do it.
    This work is too................................
4. Mr. Minh has a daughter, Lan .
    Mr. Minh is .......................................
5. What is the width of this river?
    How............................................... ..?
6. My mother often drives to work.
    My mother often goes ....................
7. What is the price of a cake and an orange?
    How............................................... ..?
8. That book belongs to Nam.
   That is........................................

 

                                                    

     TEST 12

TRẮC NGHIỆM

I/ Choose the best options to complete the statements ( 30 Ms ).

1/ There are four…………………….. in a year : Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter.

a. activities                  b. pastimes             c. seasons                        d. weathers

2. It is often cool in the………………………………………………………………………

a. Spring                       b. Summer              c. Autumn                       d. Winter

3. ………………………water do you want ? à I want 2 bottles.

a. How many                b. How much           c. How often                  d. How long

4. ……………………………do they go to school ? à By motor bike.

a. What                         b. When                  c. How                            d. Where

5. ………………………….. does Nga watch TV ? à Everyday.

a. How many                b. How much               c. When                    d. How often

6. She ……………………………………go to the market .

a. usually does not       b. does usually not    c. does not usually     d. usually not does

7. It …………………………………hot in the  Summer.

a. is often                      b. often is                 c. not often is                    d. not is often

8.  My father ……………………chess with Mr Hung on Sundays.

a. play sometimes        b. sometimes play    c. plays sometimes       d. sometimes plays

9. Mai likes…………………………to music in her free time.

a. listens                        b. listen                    c. listening                       d. to listen

10. They often go camping ……………………. the mountain.

a. in                                b. at                           c. on                              d. to

11. Tuan is good ……………………….. English and Math.

a. at                                b. in                            c. on                              d.  between

12. Look ! the bird ………………………………………………………………………….

a. fly                              b. is flying                  c. are flying                    d. flies

13. What are the boys ………………………… at that time ?

a. do                               b. . does                     c. doing                          d.  to do

14. My house is between the movie theater…………………………….the store.

a. between                      b. next             c.     opposite                   d. and

15. Tuan is sitting…………………………………………. Minh and Lan.

a. between                     b. to the left of                c. behind             d. near

16. The sun rises in the east and …………………………………….in the west.

a. set                               b. setting                         c. sets                  d. to set

17. There are……………………………………….oranges on the table.

a. some                           b. any                                c. a                     d. an

18. There isn’t ……………………………. water in the bottle.

a. a little                          b. any                               c. a                     d. many

20. I’d like a……………………………………………. of soap.

a. can                              b. tube                            c. bottle                d. bar

21. ……………………………………..are they ? à Two dollars.

a. How much                  b. How many                     c. How               d. What

22. She is ………………………………… She likes some fish and some rice.

a. hungry                        b. tired                            c. thirsty                d. full

23. …………………. the matter with Ba ? à He is tired.

a. What                           b. How                           c. What’s                 d. How’s

24. …………………………..the weather like in the Spring ?--> It is warm .

a. How                            b. What                          c. What’s               d. when

25. ………………….. color are her eyes ? à They are black.

a. How                              b. Which                       c. what                    d. when

26. ………………………………… school do you go to ? à Nguyen Hue School.

a. Which                         b. Where                        c. What                  d. When

27. We have English ………………………. Monday and Wednesday.

a. at                                 b. on                                 c. in                      d.  when

28. ……………………………..is the place where people meet and eat.

a. Museum                        b. Factory                      c. Stadium            d. Restaurant

29. My father is driving a car. He is a………… …… …………. .

a. doctor                            b. teacher                   c. driver                d. engineer

30. When your teeth hurt. You have to go to the ………………………………….

a. doctor’s                         b. dentist’s                    c. teacher’s          d. farmer’s

II/ Choose the word that has the underlined part  pronounced  differently.

   1. a.  vacation              b.  match                          c.  badminton          d.  plan

   2. a . temple                 b.  tent                             c.  camera               d.  destination

   3. a. citadel                  b.  idea                             c.  bring                  d.  visit

   4. a.  photo                   b.  go                                c.  home                  d . hot

   5. a.  uncle                    b.  music                          c.  minibus              d . summer

III/ Choose the word or phrase that are not correct  .( 5 Ms).

 

1 .Mr Nam rides his bike to work at the moment .

                     A             B           C         D

2. I don’t have some apples, but I have some oranges.

                     A     B                   C                D

3. How many homework does Nga have everyday.

                 A           B                            C          D

4. I would like a tube of chocolates , please .

          A            B   C              D

5. She goes to visit her grandmother and grandfather next week.

            A           B    C                                       D

IV / Odd one out . ( 5 Ms ).

1. a. aunt                      b.  uncle                               c.  friend              d.  sister

2. a. take                      b.  vacation                          c.  swim               d.  bring

3. a. doctor                   b.  hospital                           c.  teacher           d.  businessman

4. a. town                     b.   city                                 c.  country           d.  house

5. a.  tired                     b.  hungry                            c.  happy             d.  feel

V/ Read the passage then decide the statements True or False.

       Peter is a gymnast. He is tall and thin. He has short black hair. His eyes are brown. He has a round face and thin lips. Peter is having breakfast now. He is eating some noodles. He often has noodles or hamburger and hot dog for his breakfast. After breakfast, he eats some apples and bananas. Then he drinks some coca cola. He feels full and quite tired.

Number

Statements

True

False

1

Peter’s hair is short and black.

 

 

2

He has big and  black eyes.

 

 

3

He is eating hamburger and hot dog now.

 

 

4

He is drinking coca cola at the moment.

 

 

5

He feels very  hungry and comfortable.

 

 

 

TỰ LUẬN

I / Make questions for these sentences ( 10 Ms ).

1……………………………………………………………………………………………?

à They would like a dozen eggs.

2. …………………………………………………………………………………………..?

à Her favorite food is fish and chicken.

3. ………………………………………………………………………………………. ?

à My father works in a factory.

4.………………………………………………………………………………?

à Thuy’s house is in the country.

  5. ………………………………………………………………………………….?

à The police station is between my house and the hotel.

6. …………………………………………………………………………………..?

à When it is hot, Lan goes swimming.

7. ……………………………………………………………………………………?

à It is often cold in the winter in the north of Viet Nam.

8. ……………………………………………………………………………………?

à I am going to visit Dalat this Summer vacation.

9. …………………………………………………………………………………..?

à They are going to stay in Hue for a week.

10. ………………………………………………………………………………….?

à Minh is from Viet Nam.

II/ Rewrite the sentences with the same meanings (5Ms ).

1. How much is a kilo of beef ?

à How much does…………………………………………………………………

2. What is the price of a box of chocolates.

à How ………………. ………………………………………………………….

3. How many bananas do you want ?

à How many ……………….……………………………………………………

4. His father usually drives to work.

à His father ………………………..………………………………………………

5. Does Phong’s School have thirty classrooms?

à Are there………………………………………………………………………

III/ Give the correct form of the verbs (10 Ms ).

    1. Look! The plane ( fly ) towards the airport.

à…………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Why we (not go) to Ha Long Bay this Summer holiday ?

à……………………………………………………………………………..

  1. Tuan often ( play ) basketball in the winter.

à …………………………………………………………………………………

  1. What you (do) now ? à We (listen )to music.

à……………………………………………………………………………………

  1. My brother (use) the computer in his room now. He (use )it everyday.

à……………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Mrs. Smith always (teach) class 6a2, but this morning he (teach )class 6 a3.

à…………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Mai and Tung ( be ) students.

à…………………………………………………………………………………

IV/ Use the cue words to write to complete the sentences. (10 Ms )

  1. Quang brother/ walk/ movie theater/ moment.

  à……………………………………………………………………………

  1. Ba/ usually / play volleyball/ fall/ but sometimes/ sailing.

à………………………………………………………………………………

  1. My mother/ like/ half a kilo of meat/ dozen eggs.

à……………………………………………………………………………

  1. How/ Mr. Lam/ travel/ Ho Chi Minh City.?

à……………………………………………………………………

  1. There / not / tomato/ potato/  the store.

à………………………………………………………………………

V/ Fill in the blanks with the suitable words. ( 10 Ms ).

          Viet Nam, our country, is very beautiful. It has (1)………… seasons: Spring, Summer, Fall and (2)……………. In the spring it is often (3 )……………,sometimes it is rainy. In the summer it is usually hot and sunny. The( 4)…………….is cool in the Fall and in the Winter it is often ( 5 )……………and foggy. I (6 )…………….hot weather

(7 )……………I can do many activities.(8 )…………it is hot  I usually (9 )……….. swimming and (10 )…………….soccer. I sometimes go fishing with my brother.

ANSWER KEY:

        VI/ Read the passage the answer the questions ( 5 Ms ).

              Hello. My name is Julia .When  I grow up , I am going to be a ballet dancer. I love dancing, I  often go dancing three times a week. I am going to travel all over the world and I am going to learn French and Russian because I want to dance in Paris and Moscow. I am not going to marry until I am 36 and then I am going to have two children. I’d like first a girl and then a boy. I am going to work until I am 75 years old.

Answer The Questions:

  1. What is Julia going to be when she grows up ?

à………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. How often does she go dancing ?

à………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Why is she going to learn French and Russian ?

à…………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. How many children is she going to have ?

à……………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. How old is she going to work ?

 

 

TEST 13

 

I. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR. (35 points)

Part 1:Choose the best answer among A, B, C or D. (15 points)

1. My father is..................... man.

         A. a old                       B. an old                     C. not young                     D. not very young

2. I’m tired. I’d like..................... .

         A. sit down                 B. sitting down           C. to sit down                   D. to sitting down

3. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large ..................... .

         A. tin                           B. roll                          C. bar                                D. tube

5. Bangkok is ..................... capital of Thailand.

         A. a                             B. one                          C. X                                  D. the

6. There are ..................... girls in his class.

         A. not                          B. no                           C. none                              D. any

7. ..................... she plays the piano!

         A. How beautiful              B. How beautifully              C. What good              D. What well

8. On ..................... we often go out.

         A. nights of Saturday  B. Saturday nights

         C. Saturday’s nights                                        D. none is correct

9. I don’t want much sugar in coffee. Just ....................., please.

         A. little                        B. a little                     C. few                               D. a few

10. The weather is ..................... today than yesterday.

         A. much better            B. very better              C. too better                      D. so better

11. A. Always they do their homework.                  B. They always do their homework.

      C. They do their homework always.                  D. They always do their homeworks.

12. Minh is from Viet Nam. He’s ..................... .

         A. a Vietnamese          B. Vietnamese          C. a Vietnamese man           D. the Vietnamese man

13. Choose a word that has different stress pattern:

         A. beautiful                 B. vegetable                C. breakfast                       D. apartment

14. What ..................... the weather like in the summer?

         A. is                             B. was                         C. does                              D. would

15. It’s very hot. Why ..................... go swimming?

         A. not we                    B. not                       C. don’t we                    D. Both B & C are correct

16. At an intersection, you ..................... slow down.

         A. can                          B. should                     C. must                              D. have

17. Which word has the final sound /s/:

         A. bananas                  B. carrots                     C. apples                           D. guavas

 

18. Don’t move. You have a ..................... leg.

         A. break                      B. breaking                  C. broke                            D. broken

19. If there aren’t any trash cans, we should put it in a bag and ..................... .

         A. take it to our home B. take it to home

         C. take it home                                                D. take it back our house

20. Our roads are dangerous places. We ..................... .

         A. can be careful                                             B. must be careful            

         C. mustn’t be careless D. Both B & C are correct

21. Make sure ..................... is no traffic.

         A. they                        B. it                             C. there                             D. some

22. Let’s eat here. The ..................... seems very good.

         A. list                          B. paper                       C. programme                   D. menu

23. There’s a good film ..................... ..................... the Rex Cinema tonight.

         A. on / in                     B. on / at                     C. in / on                           D. in / at

24. Don’t ..................... electricity.

         A. save                        B. waste                      C. use                                D. leave

25. The boy suffered ..................... a very bad toothache.

         A. of                            B. from                        C. with                              D. by

26. ..................... book is this, yours or mine?

         A. What                      B. Which                     C. Whose                          D. Who’s

 

Part 2: Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets. (10 points)

1. Anna likes attending the English .............................................. contests.                 (SPEAK)

2. My neighborhood is ..................................... for good and cheap restaurants.          (FAME)

3. I like the city life because there are many kinds of .......................................           (ENTERTAIN)

4. Van’s classroom is on the ......................................... floor.                                      (TWO)

5. These children like ........................................ weather.                                             (SUN)

6. Lan speaks English ....................................... than me.                                             (WELL)

7. The Great Wall of China is the world’s ..................................... structure.              (LONG)

8. What’s Maco’s ........................................? - She’s British.                                       (NATION)

Part 3: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets. (10 points)

1. The sky is very dark. I think it ....... .(rain)

2. David .............. his hands. He .......... the television set. (wash/ just repair)

3. Come to see me at 5 this afternoon. I .............home until 4.30. (not arrive)

4. ............, please! The baby ...........(not talk / sleep)

5. It ............ hard. We can’t do anything until it ..............(rain / stop)

6. Would you mind ........on the light? I hate ..........in a dark room. (turn / sit)

II. READING (25 points)

Part 1: Put these sentences in the right order to complete the passage. Number 1 has been done for you as an example. (10 points)

A. For example, you can get hot dogs

B. a famous fast food restaurant. Do you

C. Today fast food is very

D. the same as one in Mac Duff’s in Tokyo!

E. a fast food restaurant, you can

F. and boxes. Mac Duff’s is the name of

G. You can even take it home.

H. know that a beef burger in Mac Duff’s in London tastes

I. get different kinds of food cheaply and quickly.

J. or beef burgers in paper bags

K. popular throughout the world. In

Part 2: Complete the following letter with the appropriate words. The first letter(s) of each word is (are) given. (15 points)

Dear Mum and Dad,

Hi. I’m on (0) holiday­_ in Vietnam with Ted and Booby. We (1) ar______ in Dalat yesterday. It is a very beautiful city and is (2) kn_________ as the city of Eternal Spring. Dalat is very famous for its (3) water_________, lakes and flower gardens. The first two days the weather was fine, warm and sunny, so we did some (4) sight_________. I took a lot of photographs. On Thursday we went shopping. Everything was cheap, so we bought lots of (5) sou_________ and two nice sweaters for you. In the evening we had (6) d_________ at a lovely little restaurant and then went to a coffeehouse to (7) e_________ Trung Nguyen Coffee. Last night we went to the theater and didn’t get back (8) un_________ 11pm. So, we got up late this morning and (9) dec_________ to have a relaxing day at the hotel. So, that’s(10) wh_________ I’m now.

Love, Peter

III. Writing: Make meaningful sentences using the following cues. (20 points)

1. What time / Ngoc/ get / morning?

.......................................................................................................................................................

3. Long/ walk / ride / bike / school?

.......................................................................................................................................................

4. When / it / cold/ I/ never/ go / swim.

.......................................................................................................................................................

5. What / there / front / your house?

.......................................................................................................................................................

6. If / you / not feel / well / should / see / doctor.

.......................................................................................................................................................

7. What color / your baby / eyes?

.......................................................................................................................................................

8. My uncle/ 4 years / old / mother.

.......................................................................................................................................................

9. I / beef/ so / sister.

.......................................................................................................................................................

10. Huong / learn / languages / bad.

 

TEST 14

 

I. Hãy chọn một từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác từ còn lại.

   1.      A. arm                                     B. grade                       C. face                         D. late

   2.      A. look                                   B. book                       C. cook                        D. food

   3.      A. skip                                     B. kilo                         C. twice                       D. fish

   4.      A. early                                   B. weather                   C. heavy                      D. head

   5.      A. boat                                    B. coat                         C. road                        D. broad         

   6.      A. pound                                 B. out                          C. shoulder                  D. sound

   7.      A. sky                                      B. recycle                    C. dry                          D. bicycle

   8.      A. bush                                    B. pull                         C. brush                       D. push

   9.      A. now                                    B. how                        C. cow                         D. row

   10.    A. good                                   B. gen                          C. gold                        D. gather.

II. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc

   1. My sister (be) a doctor. She (work) in a factory in HN.

   2. How Lam (go) to school?            - She (go) by bike.

   3. My brother (not speak) English well. He (speak) Chinese well.

   4. What would you like (buy)? – I’d like (buy) some coffee.

   5. What you (do) tomorrow? – I (fish) in the lake.

   6.  Where John always (travel)? – He (travel) to HCM city.

    7. Who they (play) soccer with? – They (play) with Long

   8. Look, Hoang (run). Hoang always (run) very fast.

   9.  I (look) for my books now but I (not find) any.

   10. It always (rain) in summer and (be) cold in winter.

III. Hãy chọn đáp án đúng nhất trong các câu A, B, C hoặc D.

 1. (What time /  How / Where /  When)  does she have dinner?       -She has dinner at 7. 

 2. (in   / on / at / to)  Monday, we have math.                      

 3. They live ( on / at / in / to) the city.                                  

 4. My sister (is / am / are / be) a nurse in hospital.   

 5. ( What / How / When / Where) do you go there? – by car.                      

 6. She (have / haves / has / to have)  a small cat.                                         

 7. ( This / These / They / Those) is my schoolbag.                                       

 8. They have ( a / an / one / two) old car.                             

 9. Loan is ( gooder / better / more good / good) than Hoa.                          

10. What about.( to play / playing / plays / playes) volleyball?

IV. Hãy điền một giới từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống để hoàn thành câu.

   1. Put the chair..................the window.

   2. She buys some sugar.....................her mother.

   3. please, tell me the way.................the zoo.

   4. Where are you......................?

   5. Give the ball............Peter.

   6. Take the desks and chairs.................the classroom.

   7. Is there a table...................your kitchen.

   8. Susan is going to her club...............3 o’clock.

   9. My house is...............46 Le Loi street.

   10. The vase is...................the cat and the dictionary.

V. Mỗi câu sau có một lỗi sai, em hãy viết lỗi sai đó và sửa lại cho đúng .

1.      I walks to work in the morning.                  6. There is three books on the table.

2.      Would you like to drinking milk ?              7.Peter doesn’t as tall as Henry.

3.      What does she studies in the evening?  8. How time do they go to school? – At 6:30a.m

4.      How much books do you want to buy?       9. I want to buy a old car to go to school.

5.      We are listenning to pop music now.         10. How many rice do you want to buy?

 

VI. Hãy hoàn thành đoạn văn sau, dùng từ cho tr­­ước để điền vào mỗi ô trống.

 
 

of            from        live         or         in             day    animals

parents       zoo        has                monkeys         many     fall

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

London (1)......... a very fine old zoo, which (2)....... children with their(3)......... and friends visit every day. The (4)......... is in a large park which is not far (5)...... the centre of London. Many old trees grow in the park, and (6).............spring, summer and (7).......... .There are a lot (8).........flowers there too. The zoo is open every (9)..............from 9 a.m to 7 p.m. People who want to (10)..........there can go by bus or by train (11)........by taxi. Many kinds of (12)......... go there such as :  elephants, sea-lions, and polar bears, brown bears and foxes, and big and little (13).............

VII. Hãy điền a, an, the hoặc 0 vào chỗ trống nếu cần thiết

  Mr. John is(1)........... teacher. He teaches in (2)...............small school in (3).........London.

In (4)..............morning he gets up at seven o’clock, has (5).............breakfast and (6)...........

Glass of milk. Then he goes to (7)..............work. He teaches his students (8)...........French.

He has (9)................lunch at school. He goes (10)..............home at one o’clock in (11)........

afternoon. He doesn’t work on (12)..........Saturdays and Sundays, he goes to (13)................

cinema, or reads. He likes (14).............books very much. He has (15).........sister in Oxford and (16)...........brother in (17)..............London.

VIII. Sắp xếp lại trật tự câu sau sao có nghĩa.

  1. often / the children / like / summer, / mustn’t / go to / they / school.
  2. goes / once / he / swimming / a day / often.
  3. watching / the children / the living-room / are / in / now/ TV.
  4. don’t / get up / often / I / early / the morning / in.
  5. does / have / she / history / when /math / and?
  6. should / at night / at / you / home / stay.
  7. more / than / is / intelligent / I / she.
  8. is / travel to / my sister / going to / Da Lat / next summer.
  9. clean / must / I / every day / the house.
  10. do / go to / how often  / the supermarket / you?

IX. Hoàn thành các câu sau sao có nghĩa (10 điểm ).

1. Would / you / like / drink / orange juice?           

2. What / you / watch / the moment?

3. He / always / go / school / 6:40 / the morning.   

4. She / not go / a walk / her friends.

5. They / play / tennis / now.                                  

6. I / want / buy / half / kilo / beef.

7. I / not / do / homework / the moment.              

8. What / you / often / do / the evening?

9. She / sometimes / go / the market / the afternoon.

10.The students / always / English / Monday / Thursday

 

 

 

Test 15

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1.         A. books                      B. pencels                    C. rulers                       D. bags

2.         A. read                        B. teacher                    C. eat                           D. ahead

3.         A. tenth                       B. math                       C. brother                    D. theater

4.         A. has                          B. name                       C. family                     D. lamp

5.         A. does                        B. watches                  C. finishes                   D. brushes

6.         A. city                          B. fine                         C. kind                       D. like

7.         A. bottle                      B. job                          C. movie                      D. chocolate

8.         A. son                          B. come                       C. home                       D. mother       

II. Chọn một từ không cùng nhóm với các từ còn lại

1.         A. never                     B. usually                    C. always                    D. after

2.         A. orange                    B. yellow                     C. apple                       D. blue

3.         A. see                          B. thirsty                     C. hungry                    D. hot

4.         A. carrot                      B. rice                          C. bread                      D. noodle

5.         A. face                        B. eye                          C. month                     D. leg

6.         A. you                         B. their                                    C. his                           D. my

7.         A. suger                       B. bottle                      C. box                         D. tube

8.         A. in                            B. but                          C. of                            D. under

III. Em hãy điền một giới từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau

1. My father works for a company (1)…………… Monday (2) …………… Friday.

2. He lives (3)…………………………. a house (4) ……………… the countryside.

3. Lan is standing near the store and she is waiting (5) …………………… the bus.

4. I agree (6)………..… you about that.

5. I like the weather (7) ………… June.

6. Look (8) …………………… the picture (9) ……………….. the wall, please.

7. The desk is (10)…………………. the chair and the bed.

IV. Mỗi dòng sau đây có 1 lỗi sai hày tìm và sử lại cho đúng

1.      She is always on time for the school                    ………………………

2.      She and he goes to work on foot.                         ………………………

3.      Ngoc is tall than her sister.                                              ………………………

4.      Let’s to go shopping!                                                       ………………………

5.      They like watch T.V.                                                       ………………………

6. He comes here with bicycle.                                   ………………………

7. How many childs are there in the room?                ………………………

8. He isn’t understand what you are saying.               ………………………

9. How much eggs do you want?                               ………………………

10. I’d like some tomatos for my breakfast.               ………………………           

V. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc

1. Your father……………….. (go)  to work by bike everyday?  

2. We ……………….. (not watch)  television at the moment.   

3. Let’s ……………….. (help) your friend, Nam. She (do) her homework.

4. What you……………….. (do) this summer vacation?                             

- We……………….. (visit) Ha Long Bay.                             

5. She ……………….. (not have)  breakfast at 6.30 every morning.           

6. It often……………….. (rain) in summer.                                 

VI. Hãy viết câu sau có nghĩa sử dụng từ hoặc nhóm từ gợi ý dưới đây

1. What time / Nga / get / morning?

2. You / can / games / afternoon / but / must / homework / evening.

3.  Lan / walk / ride / bike / school?

4. When / it / hot / we / often / go / swim.

5. What / there / front / your house?

6. Where/ your father/ sit/ now?

7. My class/ start/ seven/ morning.

 8. I/ not often/ swimming/ friends.

 9. Huy/ read/ book/ sister/ sing/ English song now.

VII. Fill in the blank with one suitable word.

     This (1)……… Smith’s room. You can see, his room is not very large. (2)……….

   are two chairs, a table, a bed, a wardrobe (3)……….. a bookshelf in his room. The

   table is near (4) ……….. window. There is an ink- pot, some books and (5) ………

   English- Vietnamese dictionary on the table. The bed is on the right. There are also  

   some books and newspapers on the bed. The wardrope is opposite the bed. Smith has

   many clothes. (6) ………. clothes are all in the wardrobe. The bookshelf is (7)……..

   the wall. There are many (8)………. on it.

VIII. Rewrite the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first.( 2ms)

1.      Apple juice is her favorite drink.  

She …………………………………………………………………………....                                                                                                       

2.      How many oranges do you want? 

     How many oranges would ……………………………………………………?

3.      How much is a bowl of noodles? 

     How much does …………………………........................................................?

4.      There are many students in our class.

     Our class …………………………….................................................................

5.      Why don’t we sing an English song?

     What about ……………………………………………………………………?

6.      My sister cycles to the supermarket.

            My sister goes …………………………………………………………………

7. There are forty students in my class.

=> My class has...................................................................................................

8. The flower garden is in front of the house.

=> The house......................................................................................................

9. We usually ride to school.

=> We usually go................................................................................................

10  The school is big.

=> It is .............................................................................................................

 

TEST 16

I. Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the others:

1. A. call             B. fall          C. small           D. hand

2. A. window      B. down       C. shower        D. town

3. A. cold            B.  post        C. love             D. stove

4. A. cow             B. show       C. know           D. throw

5. A. clear           B. dear         C. hear             D. head

 II. Choose the best answer :

1. Lemonade, apple juice, soda and  .............. are cold drinks.          ( beans, noodles, vegetables, iced tea)

2. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it  ............. a week.       ( once, twice, two times, three times)

3.Ngoc and Yen often do aerobics in  ................free time.                            (your, his, her, their)

4. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer. She  .............. plays soccer.                    ( always, usually, never, often)

5. He wants  ................ an engineer.                                                               ( to be, being, be, is)

6.They would like some milk  ................ dinner.                                           ( in, at, for, of)

7. Minh often goes .............. in the mountains on the weekend.                    ( walking, walks, walk, to walk)

III. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in brackets:

  1.  There are four ................................in my house.                                                       bookshelf.
  2. The photocopy is between the .....................................and the drugstore.                 bake
  3. Is your brother an .........................................?                                                            act
  4. Mai's sister is a  ......................................                                                                   sing
  5. We must be  .................................... when we cross the  road.                                  care
  6. This tree has a lot of green  ..........................................                                             leaf
  7. Is your father a  .............................................?                                                           business
  8. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ....................................................?                              nation
  9. Air ..................................... is a big problem in many cities in the world.                 pollute

10. Yoko is from Japan. She is  ................................                                                       Japan

  IV. Find and correct the mistakes:

1. My mother is going to the market with my.

......................................................................................

2. Mr. Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.

......................................................................................

3. How many homework does Lan have every day?

......................................................................................

4. The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.

5. I'm twenty-one year old and I' m a student.

.....................................................................

6. A lot of my friends play soccer, but not much of them play tennis.

....................................................................

7. Minh and his father are going to plant trees in the garden now.

8. Are they many students in your class?

V.. Read the passage and then write True  (T) or False(F)  for each sentence below:

It’s six o’clock in the evening. Many people are at home. They are having dinner. They are watching  T.V. They are  listening to music. But Mrs. Bich is going to work. She’s a doctor and she works at night  in the hospital. Today she’s late. The hospital is not in her neighborhood so she usually goes by car. Mrs Bich is in her car now. She’s driving fast. She should slow down but she must be at work by six thirty. A policeman stops her. “ You are driving too fast !” , he says. "You are going to have an accident". It’s six thirty. Mrs Bich is not at the hospital. She’s at the police station. Her car must stay there for fourteen days.

1. Many people are not working.

 

6. She is late for work.

 

2. Mrs Bich comes home every evening at six.

 

7. She  drives too fast.

 

3. Mrs Bich is a night doctor.

 

8. A policeman doesn’t keep her car.

 

4. The hospital is near her house.

 

9. She arrives at the hospital at 6.30.

 

5. Mrs Bich goes to work by  motorbike.

 

10. She isn’t going to drive her car for two weeks

 

   VI. Read the passage  and answer the questions:

Anna lives in a village in Africa. Her day starts at 4 o’clock. She gets up, and she walks three kilometers to the river. She collects some water, and carries it back to her house. The water is very heavy. It isn’t clean but there isn’t any water in the village. Anna doesn’t go to school. She can’t read or write. She helps her mother in the house.

     (carry : mang, v¸c, khiªng...)

Questions:

1. Where does Salina live?

..................................................

2. What does Salina do after she gets up?

....................................................

3. Is the water clean?

......................................................

 

4. Where does Salina help her mother?

..........................................................

5. What does she collect?

............................................................

6. Does Salina go to school?

....................................................

 

   VII. Choose the best answer :

1. newspaper / a / day / I / read / every /

a. I read newspaper every day.                                   b. I read a newspaper every day.

c. I read every day a newspaper.                                 d. I every read a day newspaper.

2. Lunch / a / grandfather / after / always / sleep / has.

a. Grandfather always has a sleep after lunch.           b. Grandfather has always a sleep after lunch.

c. Grandfather always has sleep after a lunch.           d. Grandfather always sleep after has a lunch.

3. famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.

a. I like reading books about people famous.             b. I like reading about famous people books.

c. I like reading about people famous books.             d. I like reading books about famous people.

4. listen / I / the / my / car / radio / usually / in / to.

a. I usually listen to the radio in my car.                     b. I listen usually  to the radio in my car.

c. I usually listen to my radio in the car.                     d. I usually listen in my to the radio.

5. face / eyes / big / Lan / round / black / a / and / has.

a.  Lan has a round face and big black eyes.              b.  Lan has round face and a big black eyes.

c.  Lan has a round face and black big eyes.              d.  Lan has round face and a black big eyes.

   

 

TEST 17

 

A- PHONETIC:  T×m tõ cã c¸ch ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi nh÷ng tõ kia ë ch©n g¹ch ch©n:

1/  A. teachers

B. thanks

C. pupils

D. farmers

2/ A. foot

B. door

C. good

D. book

3/ A. teeth

B. thin

C. mother

D. math

4/ A. gymnast

B. vegetable

C. dangerous

D. geography

5/ A. black

B. work

C. knee

D. look

6/ A. young

B. house

C. our

D. trousers

7/ A. cool

B. good

C. room

D. look

8/ A. watches

B. brushes

C. classes

D. lives

9/ A. station

B. question

C. invitation

D. intersection

10/ A. chest

B. school

C. lunch

D. bench

B- VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR

I/ Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng nhÊt cho nh÷ng c©u sau:

1. I must have a drink. I’m so …      (A. dirty           B. hungry         C. thirsty                     D. thirty)

2. Fall means ….. in British English. (A. summer      B. winter         C. autumn                   D. spring)

3. I like ….. weather because I can go swimming.( A. hot    B, cold            C. of                D. foggy)

4. They usually go …. after work.    (A. to fishing    B. cinema        C. home                       D. soccer)

5. Would you like ……. that for you? ( A. me doing            B. me to do     C. me do         D. I do)

6. Don’t be late ….. your music lesson . ( A. on        B. from            C. by                           D. for)

7. What would you like to drink?  - …(A.Thank you    B.Yes, please     C.No, I don’t        D.Tea, please)

8. Let him …. it himself.                    (A. to do          B. do               C. doing                      D. does)

9. How many floors …… in your school? (A. are there    B. there are          C. have there   D. do have)

10. Nam is learning English … the room and his dog is … the  desk.

                                    (A. at, in                      B. in, under                 C. in, on                      D. on, under)

II/ H·y dïng th× thÝch hîp cña ®éng tõ  trong ngoÆc ®Ó hoµn thµnh ®o¹n v¨n sau:

            It is 7.30 a.m and the Browns …(1. be) in the kitchen. Mrs. Brown … (2. sit) at the breakfast table. She … (3. read) the morning paper. Mr. Brown … (4. pour) a cup of coffee. He … (5. drink) two cups of coffee every morning before he … (6. go) to work. There is the cartoon on TV, but the children are not watching it. They … (7. play) with the toys. They usually … (8.watch) cartoons in the morning, but this morning they … ( 9.not  pay) any attention to the TV. Of course. Mr. and Mrs. Brown are not watching TV either. They … (10. not like) watching cartoons.

III/ Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ trong ngoÆc ®Ó hoµn thµnh c¸c c©u sau:

  1. Nam is the ….. of the three boys.                                                       (TALL)
  2. Vietnam has a lot of …… beaches.                                                    (BEAUTY)
  3. Air ….. is a big problem in many cities in the world.                        (POLLUTE)
  4. Our school children sometimes go …..on the weekend.                    (CAMP)
  5. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ….?                                                     (NATION)
  6. Mount Everest is very high. It is the….. mountain in the world.       (HIGH)
  7. Don’t make a fire here. It’s very …..                                                 (DANGER)
  8. Is your father a …..?                                                                           (BUSINESS)

IV/  Mçi c©u sau cã mét lçi sai, em h·y t×m vµ ch÷a l¹i cho ®óng:

  1. How much rice and how many beef do you want?
  2. I usually haven’t lunch on Friday because there isn’t enough time.
  3. John doesn’t like cats, and his sister likes them very much.
  4. Do you know some American people?
  5. A lot of my friends play tennis, but not much of them play badminton.
  6. Minh and his father are going to plant trees in the garden now.
  7. Is she work eight hours a day and six days a week?

8. Tony have two brothers but he doesn’t have a sister.

C- READING

I/ §äc bøc th­ sau råi tr¶ lêi c©u hái theo néi dung cña bøc th­:

            Dear Lala,

            You ask me to describe my village. I live in a very nice village. It is near the sea. My school is opposite some shops. There is a swimming pool near it. There is also a large lake at the seaside of the school. Near the lake, there are some houses. A river runs through the village. There is a railway station at the side of the river. There are two hotels in the village. One of the hotels is in Main Street. Now you know all about my village. Please visit me soon. I am sure you will like everything here.

            With love,

            Paula

Questions:

1. What is Paula’s friend’s name?

2. Where does Paula live?

3. Is her village near the sea?

4. What is there at the side of the school?

5. Does the river run through the village?

6. How many railway stations are there at the side of the river?

7. Is there a hotel in the village?

8. Where is one of the hotels?

 

 II/ §äc kÜ ®o¹n v¨n sau råi viÕt T cho mçi c©u ®óng,  F cho mçi c©u sai:

WORKING IN THE HOUSE

            Today is Sunday. It is fine and warm. The Pikes are staying at home. They are working in the house now. Mr. Pike is cleaning the doors and windows. Peter is helping him. Dick is cleaning the floor. Mrs. Pike and Susan are in the kitchen. Mrs. Pike is washing the dishes. Susan is cleaning the vegetables. They are preparing the lunch. They are going to have a good lunch together.

            The Pikes are not free today. They are busy with the housework, but they are very happy. They are going to finish the housework at half past eleven, then they will have lunch. In the afternoon, they are going to the cinema. In the evening Peter, Dick and Susan are going to do all exercises before going to bed.         

1. There are six people in the Pikes’ family.

2. The Pikes have only one daughter.

3. Mr. Pike and his two sons are working in the garden.

4. Mrs. Pike is washing clothes in the kitchen.

5. The Pikes are not free today.

6. Peter, Dick and Susan are not going to do exercises in the evening.

7. They finish their work at 11.30 a.m.

8. They are going to the pictures in the afternoon.

III/ Chän ®¸p ¸n thÝch hîp nhÊt ®Ó hoµn thµnh bøc th­ sau:

            Dear Jane,

            Would you (1)….. to be my friend? I’m 14 years (2)…. and 1.30 meters (3)….. , with red hair and blue eyes. I (4)…. in Edinburgh with my parents and two sisters.

            I’m a secondary school student. I go to school every day (6)…. 9 a.m ….. 3.30 p.m. First, we have lessons. Then we have lunch-break for one and (7)….. hours. After this we (8)…..  have more lessons (9)….. games.

            I hope you will write to me (10)….. about yourself.

            Your sincerely,

1/ A. like                     B. want                       C. get                          D. need

2/ A. age                      B. of ages                    C. old                          D. time

3/ A. tall                      B. high                        C. big                          D. long

4/ A. stay                     B. am living                 C. live                         D. staying

5/ A. older                   B. elder                       C. the oldest                D. the eldest

6/ A. at/at                    B. at/to                        C. between/at                          D. from/to

7/ A. half a                  B. half an                    C. a half                      D. half

8/ A. mostly                B. either                      C. both                        D. some time

9/ A. with                    B. or                            C. and                         D. after

10/ A. and tell             B. and telling              C. to telling                 D. tell

 WRITING

 Em h·y viÕt l¹i c¸c v©u sau b¾t ®Çu b¨ng tõ cho tr­íc sao cho nghÜa c©u kh«ng ®æi:

1. Does your school have twenty classrooms?           ’  Are ……

2. Phong has a sister, Lan.                                          ’   Lan is ….

3. My mother often drives to work.                            ’   My mother often goes …..

4. What is the width of this road?                               ’   How …..

5. The Mekong River is longer than the Red River.  ’ The Red River ….

6. How many oranges do you want?                          ’ How many oranges would…..

7. There are twelve packets of tea in this box.           ’ This box has ….

8. How much does a bowl of noodles cost?               ’ How much is …….

 

 

TEST 18

Question :I Phonetics  (5 points) Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.(T×m nh÷ng tõ mµ phÇn g¹ch ch©n ®­îc ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i)

1. A. bread                  B. repeat                      C. cheap                      D. teach

2. A. those                   B. that                         C. this                          D. think

3. A. smile                   B. kind                        C. polite                      D. silly

4. A. man                    B. car                           C. hat                          D. bag

5. A. blood                  B. food                        C. pool                        D. room

 

Question : II (15 points) Put each verb in brackets into an appropriate form.

                                       ( Chia nh÷ng ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc cho phï hîp th×)

1. Let’s ( go)______  swimming.                                                                   

2. Mai often ( play) ______ games with her brother.            

3. They often ( go)______ for a walk after school.                           

4. Nam never ( go) ______ to school in the evening.            

5. There ( be) ______no trees in our school garden.                                     

6. Look ! John ( come) ____.                                                                        

7. Peter ( come) ___ from England. He ( come) ___ here 6 months ago to learn Vietnamese. Now he ( be) in the sitting room. Yesterday he ( visit) ___ me.

8. How old ( be) ___ your parents?

9. Who ( stand) ____ over there?

10. What your mother ( do) ____ in the mornings?

11. My close friend ( have) ____ got two brothers.

12. My team ( have) ___ dinner now.

Question :III (15 points) Choose the best answer to complete each sentence.

                                                  ( Chon ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®Ó hoµn thµnh c©u)

1. Would you like ______tea?

            A. any             B. some                       C. a                              D. many

2. There ______ much beer in the bottle.

            A. isn’t                        B. aren’t                      C. is not                       D. A&C

3. ______ does Nam have a toothache? – Because he eats too many cakes.

            A. What                      B. When                      C. Why                        D. Who

4. Hoa is sitting ______ her parents.

            A. next                        B. opposite                  C. in front                   D. between

5. What ______ are her eyes? – They are black.

A. subject                    B. colour                     C. time            D. class

6. Are there any English ______ in your class? – No, there aren’t.

            A. students                  B. student                   C. child                       D. teacher

7. How much ______ is there in the cupboard? – There’s a lot.

            A. eggs                        B. oranges                   C. milk                        D. apples

8. I’m going ______ some oranges.

            A. buying                    B. buy             C. buys                        D. to buy

9. My sister is ______me.

            A. tall than                  B. taller than               C. than tall                   D. than taller

10. The Mekong River is______ than The Red River.

            A. longer                     B. taller                       C. shorter                    D. higher

11. She is from Japan. She speaks ______.

            A. Vietnamese B. English                   C. Chinese                   D. Japanese

12. Everest is ______mountain in the world.

            A. the height               B. the higher                C. highest                    D. the highest

13. She is studying hard. She is going to be______ student in my class.

            A. the best                   B. best             C. the better                D. better

14. What______ the weather like today?

            A. do                           B. is                             C. does                        D. A&B

15. What do you often do______ the summer?

            A. at                            B. in                            C. on                           D. for

Question : IV (10 points) Give the correct form of the word in the bracket.

                                           ( Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ trong ngoÆc)

0. He said Good morning in the most ……………. way.              (FRIEND)

1. Her father is careless. He drives car ____ .                                    ( CAREFUL)

2. I have ___ friends than my brother has.                                         (FEW)

3. Live ____ ! My mother said to me.                                                            ( HAPPY)

4. Adjective of danger is ___ .                                                            (DANGER)

5. What is his ____ ?                                                                          ( NATION)

6. Every nation needs ____ .                                                              ( FREE)

7. Is this information ___ for you?                                                     ( USE)

8. Drinking wine much is ___ to our health.                                      ( HARM)

9. All ____ people came on time.                                                       ( INVITE)

10. We always swim in the ____ pool in Summer.                            ( SWIM)

Question : V (10 points) Put question for the underlined part in the following answers ( §Æt c©u hái cho phÇn g¹ch ch©n). 

            Example:        I live in a small village.

            Question:        Where do you live?

1. The students are sitting in the classroom.

2. Linda has to stay in bed because she is sick.

3. My classmates like camping in the park.

4. My father went to work two hours ago

5. There are 20 hotels in this city.

6. I last saw him when I was a student.

7. I sometimes go to school on foot.

8. Our father always gets up early.

9. Our school is very beautiful and big.

10. Mr. Smith comes from the United States.

Question : VI (5 points) Find out one mistake in each sentence and correct it.

                                 ( Mçi c©u cã mét lçi t×m ra vµ söa l¹i ®Ó c©u trë nªn ®óng)

        Example: The man is driving car very fastly.                            fastly  à fast

1. There is a few water in the glass.

2. There is a few books on the shelf.

3. They often go swim in the summer.

4. Mai and Nam don’t go to school in Sundays.

5. Mr. Linh usually have dinner at seven o’clock in the evening.

Question : VII (10 points)    

a/ Read the passage and choose the best option to complete each blank.

    ( Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®Ó hoµn thµnh ®o¹n v¨n)

Every spring children go (1) ______, so Mr. John and his wife (2) ______  to Paris on holiday. They stay in a hotel near The River Seine. They (3) ______  breakfast in the hotel, but they have lunch in a restaurant next to the hotel. French food (4) ______  delicious. They walk a lot, but sometimes they go (5) ______  taxi. After four days they want to go home and go back to work.

1. A. ski                             B. to ski                       C. skiing                      D. A&B

2. A. goes                          B. go                           C. going                      D. to go

3. A. have                          B. has                          C. having                     D. to have

4. A. is                               B. ’s                             C. are                           D. A&B

5. A. on                             B. by                           C. in                            D. to

b/ Read the passage and then answer the following questions

    ( §äc ®o¹n v¨n sau ®ã tr¶ lêi c©u hái ë d­íi)

Mr. Brown is a farmer. He has got some paddy fields and he grows a lot of wheat. He also has got a small garden. He grows a few vegetables there. He has some animals. He has got two cows and seven pigs. He also has got a lot of chickens, two dogs and one cat. The cows produce a lot of milk. The dog keeps the house safe. The cat kills a lot of mice on the farm. The chickens produce a lot of eggs. The pigs produce a little pork and bacon. His animals are useful.

1. What does Mr. Brown do?

2. How many paddy fields has he got?

3. How many cows has he got?

4. How many dogs has he got?

5. Are his animals useful?

 

 

TEST 19

 

Question I: Fill in the blank with one suitable word: (2m)

family        comes        watches        cleaning

talking           are           go             market

My sister and I (1) ______________ to school in the morning and come home in the afternoon. Our mother goes to the (2) ______________ at half past seven. She gets food for the

(3) _____________ Our father (4) ____________ home at six everyday. He (5) _____________ television in the evening. Today is Sunday. We are at home, and we are (6) ______________ our house. We are working and (7) ______________ . We (8) ______________ having a good time at home.

Question II. Put the verbs into correct tense or form: (2 ms)

1.        He still (do) ______________  our work now. But he will (go) ______________  with you when he (finish) ______________  it.

2.        On my way home I often (meet) _____________  many children who (go)  _____________ to school.

3.        The sun (rise) ______________  in the east and (set) ______________  in the west.

4.        Mary (not work) ______________ today because it's Sunday.

5.        4. My father and I (visit) ______________ Ha Long Bay this summer vacation.

Question III. Circle the best answer A, B or C to complete each of the following sentences

(2 pts)

  1. Mexico City is _______ city in the world.

      A. biger                       B. big                          C. bigger                     D. the biggest

  1. My brother and I _______ our grandmother next weekend.

      A. visit                        B. am going to visit  C. am visiting    D. are going to visit

  1. We go to the movies____ Sunday evening.

      A. to                            B. at                             C. on                           D. for

  1. There is _______ milk in the glass.

      A. a                             B. any              C. some                       D. the

  1. She has_______ .

      A. a long black hair    B. a black long hair     C. A hair long black D. long black hair

  1. Many Asian animals are ______ danger.

      A. in                            B. on                           C. at                             D. of

  1. I feel lonely because I have______  friends there.

      A. a little                     B. a few                      C. little                        D.  few

  1. ______  boy in the corner is my friend.

            A. The                         B. An                          C. A                            D. Ø

Question IV.  Insert the correct form of the words in brackets: (2 ms)

Ex: My mother is a______________ of English.                                           (TEACH)

       My mother is a teacher of English.

1.        Her brothers are ______________                                                   (FARM)

2.        She sent her best wishes for my future______________ .               (HAPPY)

3.        He was punished for his______________ .                                     (LAZY)

4.        We don’t like going in his car as he is a______________ driver.               (CARE)

5.        AIDS is a______________ disease.                                                 (DANGER)

6.        She looks______________ in her new coat.                                    (ATTRACT)

7.        He turns out to be the______________ student in his class.            (GOOD)

8.        Nam is always ______________                                                      (BUSINESS)

Question V. Rewrite the sentences in a way that is has similar meaning to the original sentences:

1.    Mai is not as tall as Lan.

           → Lan is. .......................................................................................................

2.    The black car is cheaper than the red car.

           →The red car ............................................................................................................

3.    This film is more interesting than that one.

           →That film is ............................................................................................................

4.    Our school has 1600 students.

            There are ………………………..........................................................................

Question VI. Read the passage and decide if the statements are True (T) or False (F). (1pts)

Miss Lien lives in a small house in Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually has breakfast at seven in the morning and she has lunch at twelve o'clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches her students in the morning. She teaches them dialogues on Wednesdays and Fridays. On Mondays, she teaches them grammar. In the evening, she usually stays at home and listens to music. She sometimes goes to the movie theatre. She always goes to bed at ten o'clock.

0.      __F____ Miss Lien lives in a big house and teaches English at a school in Hanoi.

1.      ______   She usually has breakfast at 7.30 in the morning and has lunch at home at 12 o'clock.

2.      ______   She teaches her students dialogues on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays.

3.      ______   She usually stays at home in the evening and goes to bed at 9.

4.      ______   Sometimes she goes to the movie theatre.

 

 

TEST 20

 

I. NGỮ ÂM

1. Tìm một từ có  phần gạch chân  phát âm khác với phần gạch chân của các từ còn lại

1.  A. peace

2.  A. chocolate

3.  A. practises

4.  A. year

5.  A. usually

6.  A.flower

7.  A. gymnast

8.  A. cat

9. A. brother

10. A. when

B. eat

B.lemonade

B. rises

B. early

B. summer

B. town

B. geography

B. city

B. front

B. which

C. meat

C. classmate

C.fixes

C. near

C. lunch

C. plow

C. garden

C. center

C.orange

C. who

D. near

D. name

D. misses

D. hear

D. but

D. know

D. change

D. cell

D. dozen

D. what

1........................

2........................

3........................

4........................

5........................

6.........................

7.........................

8........................

9.........................

10.......................

II. NGỮ PHÁP - TỪ VỰNG

1. Chọn đáp án thích hợp nhất (A, B, C hoặc D) để hoàn thành mỗi câu sau

 11. How ......................... kilos of  beef does she want?

     A.  many                          B. much                        C. any                           D. about

12. I don’t like vegetables but my sister .........................

     A. do                               B. likes                          C. does                          D. would like

13. “Would you like some noodles, Lan?” - “No, .........................I’m full. Thanks.”

     A. I wouldn’t                  B. I don’t                      C. I’m not                     D. I don’t like

14. “Is that your father?” - “Yes, .........................”

     A. it’s                              B. he is                          C. that is                        D. it is

15. “How ......................... oranges would you like” - “A dozen, please. And ......................... tea.”

     A. much, some                B. many, any                 C. much, any                 D. many, some

16. “Does Mary like .........................?” - “Yes. She jogs every morning.”

     A. jog                              B. to jog                        C. jogging                     D.jogs

17. “I’d like some meat, please.” - “How much .........................?”

     A. do you like                  B. do you want             C. ‘d you like                D. you need

18. Which movie theater.........................?

     A. do you want to go to  B. do you want to go    C. you want to go         D. do you want to go it

19. He has a garage. That garage is .........................

     A. him                             B. of him                       C. his                             D. of his

20. This is a / an ......................... movie.

     A. American terrific old                                        B. terrific old American   

     C. terrific American old                                        D. old American terrific

       2. Hãy cho dạng đúng của các động từ trong ngoặc

a. We ( 21 - be) ......................... tired. We’d like (22 - take) ......................... a rest.

b.Alice (23 - not take) ......................... the bus to school every day. She (24 - walk) .........................

c. There (25 - be) ......................... a teacher and forty three students in the classroom.

d. “What you still (26 - do) ......................... here at this moment? It (27 - be) 11p.m. - “Nothing”

e. Her life is boring. She (28-watch) ......................... television every night.

f. “ What you (29 - do) ......................... this summer vacation? - “We (30 - visit) ......................... our grand parents in Hue.

3. Hãy cho dạng đúng của các từ trong ngoặc

         a.You must be  (31) ......................... when you cross the road.                                   (care)

         b. My aunt has two  (32)  ......................... , a boy and a girl.                                       (child)

         c. September is the (33) ......................... month of the year.                                        (nine)

         d. My father goes (34) .........................every morning.                                                (jog)

         e.There is a (35) ......................... garden to the right of my house                               (beauty)

         f. She has small white (36) ......................... .                                                                (tooth)                                          

         g. There are  (37)  ......................... twenty eight days in February.                              (usual)                                          

         h. This is the  (38) ......................... pagoda in our country                                            (old)        

         i. In the (39) ........................., there is a museum, a factory and  a stadium.                (neighbor)

         j. Minh is (40) ......................... at English than I am.                                                    (good)                                    

4. Điền một mạo từ thích hợp (a/ an/ the hoặc q) vào mỗi chỗ trống

a. She’s  (41) ......................... good musician. She plays (42) ......................... piano beautifully.              

       b. I don’t use (43) ......................... sugar when I cook.

c. It’s (44) ......................... fast car. It’s top speed is 150 miles (45) ......................... hour.

d. (46) ......................... population of (47) .........................world  is increasing.

e. I live in (48) ......................... countryside. Sometimes I go to (49) ......................... town.

f. She often stays at home at night and listens to (50) ......................... radio.

5. Điền một giới từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong các câu sau

a. It is hot (51) .........................  the summer.

b. She has breakfast (52) ......................... bread and milk.(53) ......................... lunch, she has rice, meat, vegetables and orange juice.

c. I have lessons (54) ......................... 7 o’clock (55) ......................... a quarter past eleven.

d. They live (56) ......................... an apartment (57) ......................... the city.

e. The beef is (58) ......................... the table, (59) ......................... the chicken and the vegetables.

f. “How do you go to school?” - “(60) ......................... my father’s car.”

III. ĐỌC HIỂU

 Điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong bức thư  sau

Vietnam, our country, is very beautiful. It has four (61) _____ : spring, summer, fall and (62) _____. In the spring it is often warm, sometimes it’s rainy. In the summer it’s hot and sunny. The (63) _____ is cool in the fall and in the winter it is (64) _____and windy. I (65) _____ hot weather (66) _____ I can do many activities. (67) _____ it’s hot, I usually (68) _____ swimming and (69) _____soccer. Sometimes I go fishing (70) _____ my brother.                                                                                                                                                                                                           

      IV. VIẾT

  1. Dùng từ và cụm từ đã cho để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh  

71. You / can / games / afternoon / but / must / homework / evening

      .......................................................................................................................................................

72. Huy / read / book / sister / sing / English song / now.

      .......................................................................................................................................................

73. Miss Thuy / wash / hair / because / she / go / party / tonight.

      .......................................................................................................................................................

74. I / like / read / books / famous people.      ........................................................................................................................................................

75. Hoa / get up / early / morning / and / aerobics / keep fit.       ........................................................................................................................................................

76. His mother / tall / thin/ woman  / black / hair / blue eyes.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

77. you / usually / brush / teeth / before / go / bed?

      ........................................................................................................................................................

78. Peter / listen  / music / free time.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

79. I /can drive / but / have / car .

      ........................................................................................................................................................

80. Mrs. Baker / going / buy / some / apples / children?

      ........................................................................................................................................................

       2. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa không đổi

81. How  about going to Huong Pagoda by minibus?

      Why .................................................................................................................................................

82. My house is not far from the post office.

      My house is .....................................................................................................................................

83. I often cycle to school.

     I often go...........................................................................................................................................

84. What would Lan like for her birthday?

      What does ......................................................................................................................................

85. Jane is shorter than Mary.

     Mary is .............................................................................................................................................

86. Nam gets up at 5.30.

     Nam gets ..........................................................................................................................................

87. What is the price of this bike?

      How much .....................................................................................................................................?

88. The drugstore is to the right of the  bakery.

      The bakery ......................................................................................................................................

89. What is she?

     What ..............................................................................................................................................?

90. Her hair is long. It is black and straight.

      She has ............................................................................................................................................

3. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân

91. You can go to the supermarket to buy beef.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

92. Lan goes to school with her friends.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

93. They go to the zoo every weekend.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

94. I’d like some beef and a dozen eggs.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

95. She is going to stay there for two days.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

96. My daughters do aerobics every morning.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

97. Yoko is Japanese.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

98. Mary can’t answer the phone because she’s having a bath now.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

99. Her favorite food is fried rice.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

100. She is at work from 8 o’clock to 11 o’clock.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 26  (135 câu)

I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.

1.         A hats                          B pens                         C cats                          D books          

2.         A bus                           B museum                   C drug                        D lunch                      

3.         A heavy                       B leave                       C head                         D ready                      

4.         A fly                           B hungry                     C usually                     D early           

5.         A brother                     B these                        C thank                       D that             

6.         A door                         B book                        C look                         D cook           

7.         A read                         B teacher                     C near                          D eat               

8.         A face                          B small                        C grade                        D late             

9.         A  twice                       B swim                        C skip                          D picnic                      

10.       A arm                          B charm                       C farm                         D warm                      

II. Chọn phương án đúng nhất điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau.

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s________ home.

A. go                           B. to go                       C. going                      D. goes

2. Tuan and I________ badminton in the yard.

A. playing                   B. is playing                C. are playing              D. am playing

3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ________ go straight ahead.

A. can                          B. don’t can                C. must                        D. must not

4. They are going to New York ________  plane.

A. in                            B. by                           C. with            D. on

5. Viet is ________ something on his book.

A. writing                    B. writting                   C. wrote                      D. writes

6. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any                          D. the

7. My sister and I ________  television in the living room now.

A. am watching           B. are watching           C. is watching             D. watching

8. ________ do you go to school? .  I walk.

A. How                       B. By what                  C. How many              D. How by

9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” .  “No, ________”

A. she not plays           B. she don’t                C. she isn’t                  D. she doesn’t

10. How many floors ________ in your school?

A. there are                 B. there has                 C. are there                  D. have there

11. She is not doing __________ in the garden, just walking about.

A. anything                 B. nothing                   C. something               D. one thing

12. It is twelve o’clock, Mai Anh. Let’s ________ home

A. goes                        B. to go                       C. going                      D. go

13. These are my note books, and those are ________

A. you                         B. your                        C. yours                       D. your’s

14. Nam usually goes ________ after school.

A. to fishing                B. home                       C. the cinema             D. house

15. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any                          D. the

16. ________do you get there? – We walk, of course.

A. Why                       B. What                       C. How by                   D. How

17. What time ________ on television?

A. is the news             B. are the news           C. is news                    D. are news

18. I am very tired. .  ________.

A. Me too                    B. for me the same      C. Also me                  D. I also

19. Don’t be late ________ your school.

A. on                           B. at                             C. to                            D. for

20. I don’t want much sugar in my coffee. Just _______ please.

A. little                        B. a little                     C. few             D. a few

21. ________ is that? ~ It’s a pencil.

A. How many B. How                        C. Who                        D. What

22. Is this an ________?

A.umbrellas                 B. book                       C. eraser                      D. pen

23. I am  ________, so I don’t want to eat any more.

            A. hungry                    B. thirsty                     C. full                          D. small

24. ________do you work?   .  I work at a school.

            A. What                      B. Where                     C. When                      D. How

25. I’m going to the ________now. I want to buy some bread.

            A. post office              B. drugstore                C. bakery                     D. toystore

26. Is this her ________?

            A. erasers                    B. books                      C. an eraser                 D. eraser

27. The opposite of “weak” is ________.

            A. thin                         B. small                       C. strong                     D. heavy

28.  She doesn’t have ________friends at school.

            A. a                             B. some                       C. many                       D. much

29.  ________long or short?

            A. Does Mai have hair                                    B. Is Mai’s hair

            C. Does Mai’s hair have                                 D. Is Mai of hair

30. I need  a large ________of toothpaste.

            A. bar                          B. can                          C. tube            D. box

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc.

h.      I (1 – don’t like)  …………… coffee very much.

i.        Mrs. Nga (2 - is) ……………  a doctor. She (3 - works) …………… in a hospital.

j.        Lan (4 – is going to visit)……………  Hue this summer vacation.

k.      What are you (5 - doing) ……………  now? ~ I (6 – am doing) …………… my home work

l.        There (7 - is) …………… some milk in the fridge.

m.    Look! The plane is flying  towards the airport. It (8 – is landing/is going to land)……………

n.      My father (9 -is watching) …… TV in the living room. He often (10 - watches) …… TV in the evening.

IV. Sử dụng từ loại đúng của các từ cho sẵn để hoàn thành câu.

11.  It’s very ……noisy……… in the city.                                                     (noise)

12.  There is a ……bakery……… next to my house.                                    (bake)

13.  She is a ……teacher……… of English.                                                 (teach)

14.  I brush my ……teeth……… twice a day.                                               (tooth)

15.  Long goes ……sailing……… at the weekend.                                       (sail)

16.  Their house is on the ……fifth……… floor of the building.                 (five)

17.  Thai Binh is ……smaller……… than Hanoi.                                         (small)

18.  Do you ……usually……… play video games?.                                     (usual)

19.  This is the ……oldest……… house in my village.                                 (old)

20.  Peter ………drives……… a very big truck.                                            (driver)

V. Điền vào chỗ trống bằng 1 giới từ thích hợp.

i.        There are trees (1)……behind/next to……… my house.

j.        Lee is Chinese. He is (2)……from……… China.

k.      She lives (3)……in……… Hanoi (4)……with……… her aunt and uncle.

l.        The cat is not on the table. It’s (5)……under……… the table.

m.    I often listen (6)………to…… music (7)……in……… my free time.

n.      Can I help you? ~ I’d like a tube (8)……of……… tooth paste.

o.      We go to school (9)……in……… the morning.

p.      Jane often goes to work (10)……by……… bus.

 

 

 

VI. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau.

11.  Thuy goes to school by bus.

How does Thuy go to school?

12.  I am in grade 6.

Which grade are you in?

13.  There are four people in his family.

How many people are there in his family?

14.  Her eyes are brown.

What color are her eyes?

15.  It is cool and nice in the fall in my country.

What is the weather like in the fall in your country?

16.  They are going to school.

Where are they going?

17.  Mrs. Trang feels very tired.

How does Mrs.Trang feel?

18.  Those are peas and beans.

What are those?

19.  An ice – cream is 4,000 dong.

How much is an ice-cream?

20.  Marie speaks French.

What language does Marie speak?

VII. Haõy saép xeáp nhöõng caâu sau thaønh moät ñoaïn vaên thích hôïp , caâu ñaàu tieân vaø cuoái cuøng ñaõ hoaøn thaønh nhö ví duï.

1. E     ; 2C  3B    4A     5D    6G     7F

A. I am even less lucky . I  never  catch anything – not even an old boot

B. Instead of catching  fish, they catch old boots and rubbish .

C. But this does not worry me . Some fishermen  are unlucky.

D. I always  go home  with an empty  bag. “ You must give up  fishing ! “ my friends say.

E. Fishing is my favourite  sport . I often fish for hours  without  catching anything.

F. I don’t really like fishing. I only want to sit  in a boat  and do nothing at all.

G. It’s a waste of time. But they don’t know one important thing

 

VIII.  Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi.

11.  My school has over 25 classrooms.

There are over 25 classrooms in my school                                                                       

12.  Miss White’s face is oval. It is small.

Miss White has a small oval face.

13.  Jane goes to school on foot.

Jane walks to school

14.  What food do you like?.

What is your favorite food?                                                  

15.  He gets up at five fifteen.

He gets up at a quarter past five

16.  I brush my teeth after breakfast, lunch and dinner.

I brush my teeth 3 times a day                                                                      

17.  What does he do?

  What is his job? / what is he?                                 

18.  Why don’t we go to Dam Sen Park?

What about going to Dam Sen Park?

19.  The bookstore is to the right of the restaurant.

The restaurant is to the left of the bookstore.

20.  Carol doesn’t live far from her office.

Carol lives near her office.

 

IX. Tìm 10 lỗi sai trong đoạn văn sau và sửa lại cho đúng.

Miss Lien lives in a small house in Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually has breakfast at seven in the morning and she has lunch at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches her students in the morning. She teaches them dialogue on Wednesday and Friday. On Mondays, she teaches them grammar. In the evening, she usually stays at home and reads books. She sometimes goes to the movies theater. She always goes to bed at ten o’clock.

X. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống.

SINGAPORE

Singapore is an island city of about three million people. It's a beautiful (1) ......city..... with lots of parks and open spaces. It's also a very (2) ........clean......... city.

Most of the people (3) .......live......... in high rise flats in different parts of the island. The business district is very modern with (4) .....lots...... of high new office buildings. Singapore also has some nice older sections. In China town, there (5) .......are.......... rows of old shop houses. The Government buildings in Singapore are very  beautiful  (6).......and..........  date from the colonial days.

Singapore is famous (7)....for...... its shops and restaurants. There are many good shopping centers. Most of the (8) .....goods ..... are duty free. Singapore's restaurants (9) ....serve.... Chinese, Indian, Malay and European food, and the (10) .....prices....... are quite reasonable.= phải chăng, hợp lý

Note 82

Be famous for = be well-known for: nổi tiếng về

 

XI. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa.

1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.

Minh lives in a house near a lake

2. a / plays   / badminton / Paul / week / twice.

Paul plays badminton twice a week

2.     like / the / weather / fall/ what / is / the / in?

What is the weather like in the fall?

3.     building / tallest / in / this / my city / the / is .     

This is the tallest building in my city      

4.     good / the/ there /let’s /  and/ time / beach / go / have / to / a.

Let’s go to the beach and have a good time there.

5.     small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has.

His sister has small white teeth and thin lips.

6.     hot / go / when / I/ often/ swimming / it / is.

When it is hot I often go swimming.

7.     camping / often / do / how / you / go?

How often do you go camping?

9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer.

We are going to stay with our grandparents next summer vacation

10. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world.

The Nile River is the longest in the world.

 

 

 

XII. Haõy cho daïng duùng cuûa caùc tính töø ñaõ cho trong ngoaëc ñeå hoaøn thaønh ñoaïn vaên sau  , theo ví du.

    Example :  1 : best

            Dave and I  are having the (1-best) ________ holiday of our lives  ! We are in  Barbados, one of the (2-  loveliest ) ________  islands in the Caribean . Although it is much (3- smaller)______  than Jamaica, there seems to be ( 4- more)________ to do than in Jamaica. Moreover, the people here seem to be (5-friendlier) ________  than those on the other islands. We are staying in the  ( 6- most mordern)_________ hotel I have ever seen . It’s large and cool , and many people think it is the (7 – best) _________ hotel on the island . It’s far (8- more comfortable) _________ than any of the other hotels, and it’s even (9-bigger)____ than the world famous Belton Hotel. The (10- nearest) ________  beach  is (11- less)_________ than a hundred metres away, and so we can go swimming a lot. It’s really good, and I do wish you were here.

           

 

Test 27

I. Tìm một từ không cùng nhóm với các từ còn lại (1đ)

1. A.month                 B.seventh                    C.ninth                        D.eighth

2.A.geography             B. housework             C.math                        D.English

3.A.read                      B. watch                      C.book                        D.write

4.A.listening               B.working                   C. playing                   D.morning

II. Viết từ trái nghĩa của những từ sau đây  (1đ)

5.black   - white

6.long  - short

7.heavy  -  light

8.hungry  - full

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ( 2 đ)

9.Trang usually (listens) ………to the teacher in the class .

10. Nam (is looking ) ……………… out of the window at the moment.

11.Where’s your father ? He (is)…………..in the bathroom.

12…Do………your children (go)…………..to school by bus everyday?

13.There ( are) ………many flowers in our garden.

14.Every day Mr.Hung (doesn’t drive) …………….to work.

15. What is Mai (doing) ………….now?

16.We are tired and we’d like (to sit) …….down.

 

IV. Mỗi câu sau có một lỗi sai , hãy sửa lại cho đúng(1,5 đ)

17.How much rice and how many beef do you want? → x / many → much

18.She’d like a dozen eggs and any vegetables.       → some

19.Can you to go to the supermarket for me ,Hoa ? → go

20.We need eight hundred gram of beef.            → grams

21.What would you like buying at the canteen ? → to buy

22.There is a apple on the table.                             an

V. Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại sau đây ( 3 đ)

Lien : Hello, Mai (23)………………………………………..everyday ?

Mai : I get up at a quarter to six

Lien : (24) …………………………………………………..morning ?

Mai : I play badminton.

Lien : (25)…………………………………………………..half past six ?

Mai : No, I don’t. I go to school at six thirty.

Lien : (26)…………………………………………………..today ?

Mai : No, we don’t. We have history on Tuesday and Saturday.

Lien : So (27)………………………………………………………………?

Mai : We have English, geography and math.

Lien : (28)……………………………………………………go jogging ?

Mai : I always go jogging .

VI. Đọc đoạn văn sau rồi trả lời các câu hỏi bên dưới ( 1,5đ)

Hello, I’m Trung.This is my school. It is small and old but it is beautiful .Behind the school , there is a large yard. After school in the afternoon we often play soccer there.The yard is clean and there are many trees and flowers. My friends and I sit under these trees every morning to review our lessons. My school has two floors and fifteen classrooms.My classroom is on the first floor. There are forty - three teachers in my school. They are good teachers. I love them and I love my school very much.

Questions :

29. Is Trung’s school big ?

30. What is there behind Trung’s school ?

31. What do Trung and his friends often play after school ?

32. Where do Trung and his friends sit every morning to review their lessons

33. Does his school have two floors ?

34. How many teachers are there in his school ?

VII. Điền một từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống ( 3 đ)

Today is Sunday. (35)……. is fine and warm.Mr Kien’s family are (36)……………at home.They are working in the house now.Mr Kien is cleaning the doors and windows.Nam is helping (37)……………....Mrs Oanh and Hoa (38) …………….in the kitchen.Mrs Oanh is (39) ……….the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables.They are cooking the lunch. They are going to (40) ……….a good lunch together.

VIII. Sắp xếp những từ sau thành câu có nghĩa ( 2đ)

41. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has .

His sister has small white teeth and thin lips.

42. Brown’s / round / Mrs / or / is / oval / face ?

Is Mrs. Brown’s face oval or round?

43. coffee / aren’t / some / but / there / is / any / apples / there / iced.

There aren’t any apples but there is some iced coffee.

44. like / I / wouldn’t / because / bread / not / I’m / hungry.

I wouldn’t like bread because I am not hungry.

45. your / drink / brother’s / what / favorite / is ?

What is your brother’s favorite drink?

46. a / is / Lan’s house / garden / there / big / behind.

There is a big garden behind Lan’s house

47. Ho Chi Minh City / Mrs Oanh / do / family / to / how / and / travel / her ?

How do Mrs. Oanh and her family travel to HCM city?

48. walking / their / mountain / go / the / they / house / often / in / near.

They often go walking in the mountain near their house.

IX. Dùng từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh ( 2,5 đ)

49. Mrs Hue / children / eating / breakfast / foodstall.

Mrs. Hue’s children are eating breakfast at the foodstall.

50. your / brother / play / volleyball / yard / now ?

Is your brother playing volleyball in the yard now?

51. Mr / Mrs Thu / travel / work / car / everyday.

Mr and Mrs. Thu travel to work by car everyday

52. Nam / friends / go / school / now .

Nam and his friends are going to school now

53. Every / afternoon / school / Ba / housework / and / listen / music.

Every aftenoon, after school, Ba often does his housework and listens to music.

X. Dùng từ gợi ý ở đầu câu thứ hai viết lại câu thứ nhất sao cho nghĩa không thay đổi ( 2,5 đ) .

54. The garden is behind Nam’s classroom.

Nam’s classroom is in front of the garden

55.Tom drives to work every morning .

Tom travels to work by car every morning

56.There are four people in her family

Her family has 4 people

57. He goes to work at seven fifteen.

He goes to work at a quarter past seven.

58.This box has twelve packets of tea.

There are 12 packets of tea in this box.

 

TEST 28

I. Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất. Ghi A, B, C hoặc D vào khung ANSWERS: 

1. My friend goes to school by motorbike, but I ( doesn’t / don’t  / goes  /  does)

2. Is he  bad ( for / at / on / in ) Physics? 

3. Whose book are you reading?- It’s ( English book  / interesting / Mary’s / about Mary)

4. Who is ( tall / taller / tallest / the tallest) person in your family?

5. Where is Anne from?  - She’s from ( the France / France / French / the country of France )

6. Please speak a little more ( slow / slowly / slower / slowlier)

7. On Sunday mornings, I often go (swimming / swim / to swim /  to swimming)

8. Which is ( the biggest  / bigger / bigger than / the big), London or Tokyo?

9. What’s your (national  / country / nation / nationality) ?           - I’m Vietnamese.

10. He (doesn’t go often / often doesn’t go / doesn’t often go / often not goes) jogging.

11. I have ( little / few /  less / fewer)  books than she does.

12. My mother always wants me (to play / playing / play / to playing) the piano well.        

13. Lan’s father’s mother is her ( grandparents / grandfather / grandmother / aunt)

14. Who ( teach / does teach / do teach / teaches) you English?                

15. Nam ( is writting / is writing / writes / will write)  his exercise at the moment

16. How far it it ___ here ____ your house? – ( A.from/ with   B. from/ to    C. to/ from   D. by/ to)

17. There isn’t ( some / many / no / any) milk in the box.

18. Mrs. White has a daughter. ( Her  / She’s / He’s / His) name is Hoa.        

19. (How many / How long / How much / How often) homework do you get ?        

20. I can’t speak French but my brother (can / can’t / does / doesn’t)

21. Sports are very good for our (healthy / unhealthy / health / healthily)

22. Do you enjoy (going / go / goes / to go)  to the movie theater?

23. HCM City is one of (most beautiful / the beautifulest /beautiful /the most beautiful) cities in VN         

24. It takes me half (a / an / the / X )  hour to do this test.

25. If you don’t get up early, you’ll be late (for / on / at / to) school.

26. Chọn từ được nhấn ở vần thứ nhất:  ( A. television   B. cartoon  C. engineer   D. eraser )

27. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân  phát âm khác với những từ còn lại: (what / who / where / when)

28. What (does / has / is / can)  your English teacher like?     - She’s tall and thin.

29. What is Lan doing?   - She’s (working / making / doing / does)  her homework.

30. Ba is a _ driver. He drives very _. (carefully/careful /care/carefully /careful /careful careful/ carefully)

II. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn từ thích hợp nhất cho mỗi khoảng trống. Ghi A, B, C, hoặc D vào khung ANSWERS : (10đ)                   My Teacher

            My teacher, Miss White, is a young lady (1) _____ twenty-six. She is a nice lady. She loves her students (2) _____. She never (3) _____ angry with them. Miss White (4) _____ teaching her students. Sometimes she tells (5) ______ many interesting stories.I like to listen to her stories (6) ______ they all help us to learn some   (7) _____ lessons. Sometimes she takes us out (8) ______ a picnic. Whenever she takes us out, she tries to teach us something (9) _____. It is my dream that (10) _____ I grow up, I can become a good teacher like her.

1.   A. of                                B. with                          C. from                         D. by

2.   A. very many                   B. very much               C. too                            D. so

3.   A. is                                 B. gets                         C. makes                      D. comes

4.   A. enjoy                           B. enjoying                  C. enjoys                       D. to enjoy

5.   A. we                               B. they                         C. I                                D. us

6.   A. because                      B. when                        C. where                       D. why

7.   A. use                              B. useful                       C. using                        D. to use

8.    A. from                            B. by                            C. for                            D. of

9.    A. old                              B. new                          C. bad                          D. well

10. A. where                          B. why                          C. what                         D. when

III. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời các câu hỏi: (10đ)

            Lan’s classes all start at 8:00AM., so she gets up at 7:00. She eats a quick breakfast, and takes the bus to her school. She also has a job at the library. She works from Thursday to Saturday. She usually studies in the evening. She stays up late because of her homework. She usually goes to bed at 11:30, and on Sundays she sleeps until noon.

1. How does she go to school?

2. Where does she work?                         

3. How many days a week does she work? 

4. Does she go to bed early?               

5. Why does she stay up late?         

IV. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi ô trống. Ghi từ điền vào khung ANSWERS : (10đ)

            On school-days, Tom’s mother calls him at six. He gets up and goes to the  (1)__    . There he washeshis face and (2)   ___       his teeth. Then he gets (3)   __     and goes downstairs to have breakfast. Tom leaves home at about half past six with his school bag under his arm. He gets to school at a  (4)   ___     to seven and plays or talks with his friends (5)        ___     the bell rings.

V. Đặt câu hỏi dựa vào từ gạch chân: (20đ)

1.  My mother often walks to work. 

2.  I’d like a glass of lemon juice.   

3. I have English three times a week.  

4. I am waiting for my uncle at the station.      

5. We have Physics on Monday and Friday.  

6. Tom and Hoa can’t understand each other because their languages are different.

7.  My sister helps my mother with the housework.

8.  People often travel to Singapore by plane.  

 9. Yes. I have one brother and two sisters.

10. Mrs. Hoa’s children are playing soccer in the garden.

VI. Em hãy viết lại các câu sau với từ gợi ý, không thay đổi nghĩa của câu:  (20đ)         

1. How much is this hat?   ->  What...........?

2. How heavy is your sister?->  What ......................?/How much………….?

3. Nam isn’t tall and neither is his brother. -> Nam is short ........................................

4. This dictionary is more expensive than that one.-> That dictionary is

5. The film is very interesting. -> What .............................................................................!

6. There are eleven classrooms in our school. -> Our school ...........................................

7. No one in my class is taller than Peter. -> Peter is ….

8. His house is near his school. -> His house isn’t .......................................................

9. My brother learns English well. ->.  My brother is ...........................................................

10. The girl is beautiful. -> She ...................................................................................

 

 

TEST 29

 

Question I: Choose the best answer to fill in each blank.

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s ........................... home.A. go B. to go C. going D. goes
2. Tuan and I ..................... badminton in the yard.A. playing B. is playing C. are playing D. am playing
3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ........................... go straight ahead.A. can B. don’t can C. must D. must not
4. They are going to New York ........................... plane.A. in B. by C. with D. on
5. Viet is ............................ something on his book.A. writing B. writting C. wrote D. writes
6. Are there ................... stores on your street?A. a B. an C. any D. the
7. My sister and I ..... television in the living - room now. A. am watchingB. are watching C. is watching D. watching
8. ........................... do you go to school? - I walk.A. How B. By what C. How many D. How by
9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” - “No, ........................”A. she not plays B. she don’t C. she isn’t D. she doesn’t
10. How many floors .......................... in your school?A. there are B. there has C. are there D. have there
Question II: Give the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets.
1. Every evening my father (watch) ............................. television.
2. We (not/ read) ............................. books after lunch.
3. Tom (be) ........................ my friend. He (play) ...................... sports everyday.
4. (your students/ play) ................................................. soccer every afternoon?
5. Where (your children/ be) ...................... ......? - They’re upstairs. They (play) .......................... video games.
6. What (you/ do) ................................... now? - I (unload) ........................... the vegetables.
7. (Nam/ work) .............................................. in the garden at the moment?
Question III: Fill en each blank with the suitable word.
Today is Sunday. ........................ (1) is fine and warm. Mr. Kien’s family are ....................(2) at home. They are working in the house now. Mr. Kien is cleaning the doors and windows. Nam is helping .................... (3). Mrs. Oanh and Hoa ..................... (4) in the kitchen. Mrs. Oanh is ....................... (5) the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables. They are cooking the lunch. They are going to ........................ (6) a good lunch together.
Mr. Kien’ family are not free today. They are busy ........................ (7) the housework, but they are very happy. They are going to finish the housework at half past eleven, then .........................(8) will have lunch. In the afternoon they are going to the park. In the ......................(9) Nam and Hoa are going to ................(10) all their exercises before going to bed. 
Question IV: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group. 
1. A. gray        B. face C. orange D. make     2. A. big B. time C. fine D. light

3. A. tall B. fat C. cat D. hat                          4. A. do B. brother C. two D. to
5. A. has B. name C. family D. lamp             6. A. no B. cold C. old D. doctor
7. A. son B. come C. home D. mother            8. A. be B. the C. he Vietnamese

9. A. live B. his C. dinner D. fine                   10. A. house B. our C. four D. about
Question V: Make the question for the underlined words or phrases.
1. .................................................. ..................................? - She walks to school every day.. 
2. .................................................. .................................?- The man in the car is our new teacher.
3. .................................................. .......................? - We are having bread and milk for breakfast.
4. .................................................. ............................? - My sister works in Sydney, Australia.
5. .................................................. .......................? - There are ten boys and nineteen girls in our class.
6. .................................................. ............................? - I’m in class 6A.
7................................................. ..............................? - My brother gets up at a quarter to six.
8. .................................................. ............................? - They are traveling to work by car.
9. .................................................. ............................? - There is a lake near our house.
10. .................................................. ............................? - Mr. Hoang works in the city.
Question VI: Find the mistake in the each sentence below and correct it.
1. Minh don’t work in a bank. .................................................. .......................................
2. We don’t live in a country. .................................................. .......................................
3. When this program finish? .................................................. .......................................
4. The bank doesn’t closes until 4.30. .................................................. ................................
5. They like watch TV. .................................................. .................................
6. Would you like go to the cinema tonight? .................................................. ......................
7. He usually doesn’t come home late. .................................................. .......................
8. He comes here with bicycle. .................................................. ....................................
9. Are you enjoy the party? .................................................. ...................................
10. Can you playing chess? .................................................. .................................
Question VII: Use the given words to make complete sentences.
1. Minh/ live/ brother/ apartment/ town................................................... .................................................. ..
2. Mrs. Lan/ and/ children/ travel/ London/ plane................................................... ........................................
3. There/ be/ any flowers/ your/ school/ yard?.................................................. .............................................
4. He/ not ride/ home/ but/ go/ taxi................................................... .................................................. ........
5. Sister/ have/ bike/ and/ cycle/ work/ everyday................................................... ........................................
Question VIII: Read the following passage and answer the questions below.
Linda is a vegetarian so she doesn’t eat meat. She doesn’t have a big breakfast every morning. She usually has a slide of bread and a glass of milk. She has lunch at the office at about 11.30. She has only rice with vegetables for lunch. At weekends she often goes to a Chinese restaurant because there is a lot of delicious food for vegetarians.
* Question:
1. Why doesn’t Linda eat meat?.................................................. .................................................. ...............
2. What does Linda usually have for breakfast?.................................................. .........................................
3. What does she have for lunch?.................................................. .................................................. ...........
4. Where does she have lunch?.................................................. .................................................. ............
5. Why does she often go to a Chinese restaurant at weekends?.................................................. ................

 

TEST 30

Question I: Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from

                    the others:

  1. A. chair                       B. watch                     C. chemistry                D. which
  2. A. visit                        B. season                     C. sausage                   D. museum
  3. A. wet                         B. better                      C. rest                          D. pretty
  4. A. parents                    B. start                        C. car                           D. park
  5. A. thirty                      B. three                       C. with                        D. teeth

 Question II: Choose from the four options given ( marked A,B,C or D ) ONE best

                       answer to complete each sentence below:

  1. Minh is in her room now. She ........... English.

A. learns                      B. to learn                    C. are learning            D. is learning

  1. ........ an awful day !

A. How                       B. What                       C. Which                     D. Where

  1.  My birthday is ........ the .......of November.

A. on / thirty   B. at / thirtieth C. in / thirty                D. on / thirtieth

  1.  What is the longest month of the year? ( number of letters)

 A. September B. December   C. November   D. January

  1.  My sister usually ........... to the movie theater.

 A. go                          B. to go                       C. goes                        D. going

  1.  I am very happy to see you again after a long summer holiday. ............

 A. I do, too                 B. So am I                   C. Neither am I           D. So do I

  1.  My father is looking .. the children.

A. of                            B. on                           C. for                           D. with

  1.  – Is Singapore rather crowded?

 – No, there are .........people in Hongkong.

 A. more                      B. a lot            C. less              D. fewer

  1.  He works in a factory. He is a ..........

 A. journalist   B. teacher                    C. worker                    D. farmer

  1.  I usually go to school .......bike, but today I am going to school .....foot.

A. by / by                    B. by / on                    C. on / by                    D. on / on

Question III. Fill in each blank with a suitable word to complete the passage.

            Greeting from Hanoi. Trung and I (16).......... staying in an interesting place. We are at the youth Activity Center. People (17).......... here every summer to learn about hobbies. I’m doing photo and tennis, and Trung is learning about computer. We (18).......... up at half past six every morning and do lessons (19).......... seven to half past eleven. We have (20).......... at twelve o’clock, and then there are more lessons. So it is (21)........... work. But I like it here. We’re (22)........... a good time. It’s a (23)........... past seven in the morning now, and we (24).......... sitting on the grass in the (25)........... of the center. The weather is nice.

Question IV. Supply the correct form of the word in brackets for each gap in the

                      following sentences.

26. In my (neighbor)................ there is a park and a museum.

27. What is the (high)............ of Mount Everest?

28. Vietnam has a lot of (beauty)..............places.

29. Lan is the (small) ...................of the three girls.

30. My brother is a (study)................student.

Question V. Read the passage and tick the true (T) or false (F) statements.

            Fishing is my favorite sport. I often fish for hours without catching anything. But this does not worry me. Some fishermen are unlucky. Instead of catching fish, they catch rubbish. I am even less lucky. I never catch anything – not even rubbish. I always go home with an empty bag. “You must give up fishing!” my friends say. It’s waste of time. But they don’t know one important thing: I don’t really like fishing. I only want to sit in a boat and doing nothing at all.

     31. The writer often has a good catch of fish.

            32. Some fishermen catch fish in stead of rubbish.

            33. He is a lucky fisherman.

            34. His friends want him to give up fishing.

            35. He really likes fishing.

Question VI. Each of the below sentences has four underlined words or phrases. One

           those is not correct. Identify it by circling one of the four choices (A, B, C or D).

            36. Of the two coats, the grey one is long than the other one.

                 A                  B                   C          D

            37. There are much students in my class

                            A      B         C             D

            38. Let’s playing computer games now.

                   A         B                 C               D

            39. Mr. Hien doesn’t lives in a house in the country.

                                     A       B                     C          D

            40. That’s my sister over there. She stands near the windows.

                    A                            B                  C              D

Question VII. Use the given words to write meaningful sentences.

            41. It / learn / difficult / math.

            42. anyone / your family / like / sweets?

            43. They / take / vegetables / market / the moment.

            44. You / drive / work / or / go / bus?

            45. Our apartment / have / four rooms / and seven floor.

Question VIII. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the

                         first one. Write the answers on your answer paper.

           46. Where do you live?

                  What is  ...........................................................................................

            47. The blue dress is cheaper than the red one.

                        The red dress is............................................................................

            48. Nam is taller than any students in my class.

                        Nam is the...................................................................................

            49. There are 500 students in my school.

                        My school..................................................................................

            50. How much is that hat?

How much does.........................................................................

TEST 1

I. Choose the word in each group that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest.

1.  A. game                  B. geography               C. vegetable                D. change

2. A. read                    B. teacher                    C. eat                          D. ahead

3. A. tenth                   B. math                       C. brother                    D. theater

4. A. engineer              B. between                  C. teeth                       D. greeting

5. A. intersection         B. eraser                      C. bookstore                D. history

II. Circle the best answer among A, B, C, or D to complete the following sentences.(4ms)

1. Fall means …………… in British English

    A. Summer                          B. Winter                    C. Autumn                  D. Spring

2. What does Lien do when …………… warm?

    A. there’s                            B. it’s                          C. its                            D. they’re

3. It’s cold in our country….. the winter

    A. at                                    B. on                           C. of                            D. in

4. Tan likes …………… weather because he can go swimming.

    A. hot                                  B. cold                        C. windy                     D. foggy

5. How often do you do morning exercises in the morning?

    A. I sometimes do               B. Yes, I do                 C. I like it                    D. I play soccer

6. ……………….. straight across the road.

    A. Don’t run                        B. Not run                   C. No run                    D. Can’t run

7. I hope the ……….. can repair our car quickly.

    A. mechanic                        B. reporter                   C. architect                  D. dentist

8. The Bakers …….. dinner at the moment.

    A. is having                         B. are having               C. are eating                D. is eating

9. Look ………….. that strange man. He is looking ………LAN but she isn’t here.

    A. for, at                              B. at, for                      C. at, at                        D. at, on

10. Count ……. on   ………….one hundred, please.

    A. on , to                             B. to , on                     C. from , to                 D. at , to

III. Complete the sentences using the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. (3ms)

1.They (watch) their favorite TV programmes at the moment. ………………………………………

2.How much fruit that farmer (produce) every year?  ……………………………………….………..

3.We mustn’t (waste) too much power.  ………………………………………………………………

4.He (buy) a new house next month? ………………………………………………….………………

5.The Nile River is the longest river in the world and it (flow) to the Mediteranian Sea.  ……………

IV.  Use the correct form of the words in brackets to complete sentences . (3ms)

1. Don’t make a fire here. It’s very ………………..………                                                 danger

2. Air …………………….…. is a big problem in many cities in the world.                        pollute

3. There are a lot of …………………….. mountains in Viet Nam.                                      beauty

4. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ……………………….?                                                     nation

5. We must be …………………………….. when we cross the road                                    care

V. Read the passage and choose the correct answer to fill in the gap.  (4ms)

            I live in a house near the sea. It is  (1) old house, about 100 years old and (2) very small. There are two  bedrooms upstairs. (3) no bathroom. The bathroom is down stairs (4) the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden (5) the house. The garden (6) down to the beach and in spring and summer (7) flowers every where. I like alone (8) my dog, Reck , but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with (9). I love my house for (10) reasons the garden, the flowers in summer, the weather in fall, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.

  1. A. a                             B. an                            C. the                          D. any
  2. A. It’s                          B. It                             C. There’s                    D. They’re
  3. A. and                         B. or                            C. but                          D. too
  4. A. between                  B. next                        C. near to                    D. next to
  5. A. in front                   B. front of                   C. of front in               D. in front of
  6. A. go                           B. going                      C. goes                        D. in goes
  7. A. there is                    B. they are                   C. there are                  D. those are
  8. A. for                          B. of                            C. on                           D. with
  9. A. me                          B. I                              C. my                          D. I’m
  10. A. a                             B. any                          C. many                       D. a lot

VI. Rewrite the sentences so that it has the same meaning as the sentence printed before.  (4ms)

  1. My room is smaller than your room.

è Your room is …………………………………………

  1. Mr. Hung drives very carefully.

è Mr. Hung is ………………………………………………………

  1. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?

è Are …………………………………………………………….?

  1. Does your father cycle to work?

è Does your father get ……………………………?

  1. How much does a box of chocolates cost?

è What …………………………………………………?

 

 

TEST 2

Question I: Choose the best answer to fill in each blank.(3 ms )

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s ........................... home.

A. go

B. to go

C. going

D. goes

2. Tuan and I ..................... badminton in the yard.

A. playing

B. is playing

C. are playing

D. am playing

3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ........................... go straight ahead.

A. can

B. don’t can

C. must

D. must not

4. They are going to New York ........................... plane.

A. in

B. by

C. with

D. on

5. Viet is ............................ something on his book.

A. writing

B. writting

C. wrote

D. writes

6. Are there ................... stores on your street?

A. a

B. an

C. any

D. the

7. My sister and I ............................. television in the living - room now.

A. am watching

B. are watching

C. is watching

D. watching

8. ........................... do you go to school? - I walk.

A. How

B. By what

C. How many

D. How by

9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” - “No, ........................”

A. she not plays

B. she don’t

C. she isn’t

D. she doesn’t

10. How many floors .......................... in your school?

A. there are

B. there has

C. are there

D. have there

Question II: Give the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets.(3ms )

 

1. Every evening my father (watch) ............................. television.

2. We (not/ read) ............................. books after lunch.

3. Tom (be) ........................ my friend. He (play) ...................... sports everyday.

4. (your students/ play) ................................................. soccer every afternoon?

5. Where (your children/ be)? - They’re upstairs. They (play) video games.

6. What ……you( do) ............................ now? - I (unload) ........................... the vegetables.

7. (Nam/ work) in the garden at the moment?

Question III: Fill in each blank with the suitable word.( 3 ms )

Today is Sunday. ........................ (1) is fine and warm. Mr. Kien’s family are ....................(2) at home. They are working in the house now. Mr. Kien is cleaning the doors and  windows. Nam is helping .................... (3). Mrs. Oanh and Hoa ..................... (4) in the kitchen. Mrs. Oanh is ....................... (5) the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables. They are cooking the lunch. They are going to ........................ (6) a good lunch together.

Mr. Kien’ family are not free today. They are busy ........................ (7) the housework, but they are very happy. They are going to finish the housework at half past eleven, then .........................(8) will have lunch. In the afternoon they are going to the park. In the ......................(9) Nam and Hoa are going to ................(10) all their exercises before going to bed.

Question IV: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group. (1 m )

 

1. A. gray

B. face

C. orange

D. make

2. A. do

B. brother

C. two

D. to

3. A. has

B. name

C. family

D. lamp

4. A. son

B. come

C. home

D. mother

5. A. house

B. our

C. four

D. about

Question V: Make the question for the underlined words or phrases.(3 ms )

1. She walks to school every day.

...................................................................................................................................?

2. We are having bread and milk for breakfast.

...................................................................................................................................?

3. There are ten boys and nineteen girls in our class.

...................................................................................................................................?

4. My brother gets up at a quarter to six.

...................................................................................................................................?

5. They are traveling to work by car.

...................................................................................................................................?

Question VI: Use the given words to make complete sentences.(4ms)

1. Minh/ live/ brother/ apartment/ town.

...............................................................................................................................................

2. Mrs. Lan/ and/ children/ travel/ London/ plane.

...............................................................................................................................................

3. There/ be/ any flowers/ your/ school/ yard?

...............................................................................................................................................

4. He/ not ride/ home/ but/ go/ taxi.

...............................................................................................................................................

5. Sister/ have/ bike/ and/ cycle/ work/ everyday.

...............................................................................................................................................

Question VII: Read the following passage and answer the questions below.(3ms)

Linda is a vegetarian so she doesn’t eat meat. She doesn’t have a big breakfast every morning. She usually has a slide of bread and a glass of milk. She has lunch at the office at about 11.30. She has only rice with vegetables for lunch. At weekends she often goes to a Chinese restaurant because there is a lot of delicious food for vegetarians.

* Question:

1. Why doesn’t Linda eat meat?

...............................................................................................................................................

2. What does Linda usually have for breakfast?

...............................................................................................................................................

3. What does she have for lunch?

...............................................................................................................................................

4. Where does she have lunch?

...............................................................................................................................................

5. Why does she often go to a Chinese restaurant at weekends?

...............................................................................................................................................

 

TEST 3

I/ Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the others:(20points)

1

A.game

B.geography

C.vegetable

D. change

2

A.read

B.teacher

C.eat

D. ahead

3

A.tenth

B.math

C.brother

D. theater

4

A.engineer

B.between

C.teeth

D. greeting

5

A.intersection

B.eraser    

C.bookstore

D. history

6

A.plays

B.says

C.days

D. stays

7

A.watches

B.brushes

C.classes

D. lives

8

A.their

B.math

C.thing

D. theater

9

A.station

B.intersection

C.question

D. invitation

10

A.teacher

B.children

C.lunch

D. school

11. A. call                    B. fall                          C. shall                        D. wall

12. A. clown               B. down                      C. own                        D. town

13. A. above                B. glove                       C. love                         D. move

14. A. cow                  B. show                       C. know                      D. throw

15. A. clear                  B. dear                        C. hear                         D. pear

16. A. thank                B. that                         C. this                          D. those

17. A. cost                   B. most                        C. post                         D. roast          

18. A. arm                   B. charm                      C. farm                        D. warm

19. A. come                 B. home                       C. some                       D. none

 20. A. cow                 B. now                        C. how                        D. show

VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR

II Choose the best answer to fill each blank(30 points)

1.      It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s……..home.

            A. go               B. to go                                   C. going                      D. goes

2.      Tuan and I……..badminton in the yard.

            A. playing       B. is playing                            C. are playing              D. am playing

3.      This sign says “stop!”. We ……..go straight ahead.

A. can              B. don’t can                            C. must                        D. must not

4.      They are going to New York……..plane.

A. in                B. by                                       C. with                        D. writes

5.      Nam is ……..something on his book.

A. writing        B. written                                C. wrote                      D. writes

6.      Are there……..stores on your street?

A. a                 B. an                                        C. any                          D. the

7.      My sister and I……..television in the living room now.

A. am watching           B. are watching           C. is watching             D. watching

8.      ……..do you go to school? – I go there on foot.

A. how                        B. by what                  C. how many               D. how by

9.      “Does Tom play volleyball?”  - “No, …..”

A. she not plays           B. she don’t                C. she isn’t                  D. she doesn’t

10.  How many floors …….in your school?

A. there are                 B. there has                 C. are there                  D. have there

11 The city is noisy, but the country is ………….

a. silent                        b. quiet                        c. peace                       d. busy

12 In my bedroom, there are ..................... pictures on the wall.

a. a                               b. any                          c. much                       d. some

13. My father is tall, but my brother is ………….

a. tall               b. taller                                    c. tallest                       d. the tallest

14 Mom: Would you ……. noodles? Yes, please.

a.  want                       b. like                          c. has                           d. have

15. Ba’s house is near my house. He is my ……………

a.  brother                    b. classmate                 c. neighbor                  d. friend

16 I often help my brother ............. his homework.

a. of                             b. for                           c. with                         d. from

17 Anna is talking ...................  Annie.

a.  to                            b. with                         c. of                             d. on

18. They ……… go out at weekend. They stay at home.

a. always                     b. usually                     c. sometimes               d. never

19. Is there ………….. else you want?

a. a                               b. an                            c. anything                  d. something

20. Does Mrs. Van ………….. one kilo of sugar.

a. need                         b. needs                       c. to need                    d. needing

21. My brother is 1.68 m ...................

            . short                          b. tall                           c. taller                                    d. shorter

22. What time .................. the class start?      At seven o’clock.

a. do                            b. is                              c. are                           d. does

23. You and .................. are the same height.

a. me                           b. my                           c. I                               d. Mine

24 How ............... is it from your house to the market?

a. fast                           b. far                            c. long                         d. much

25. Don't ........... up late!

a. stay                          b. stays                        c. to stay                      d. staying

26 Lan is ………… aerobics.

a. do                            b. doing                       c. play                         d. playing

27 What about …………… to the movies?  - Yes. That’s good idea.

a.  go                           b. going                       c. to go                        d. goes

28 My brother ……………… a shower after school.

a.  have                        b. has                           c. washes                    d. take

29. Tam: ……….. is behind your house?       Nam: There is a big rice paddy.

a. Which                      b. What                       c. When                       d. Where

30. He wants ………………. an engineer

a. be                             b. to be                        c. being                       d. to being

III Fill in each blank with the suitable given word.(10 points)

   There are four (1)…… in a year. (2)….. are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the (3)……., the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold (4)…. not very cold. There are (5)…. flowers in the spring. In the summer, the day is long and the night is (6)…. People often (7)… swimming in this season. The fall is the season (8)… fruits. In the (9)…, it is usually very cold. The day is  short and the (10)…. is long.

1.

A.

weather

B.

seasons

C.

activities

D.

months

2.

A.

It

B.

What

C.

They

D.

The

3.

A.

summer

B.

autumn

C.

fall

D.

spring

4.

A.

but

B.

and

C.

in

D.

too

5.

A.

many

B.

much

C.

two

D.

lots

6.

A.

long

B.

short

C.

fat

D.

tall

7.

A.

go

B.

do

C.

play

D.

skip

8.

A.

on

B.

of

C.

at

D.

in

9.

A.

summer

B.

fall

C.

winter

D.

spring

10.

A.

afternoon

B.

morning

C.

dinner

D.

night

IV/Give the correct form of the verbs(10points)

1)Tuan and his brother (not watch)……… …TV at the moment. They (be)………asleep.

2)My father always (come)…………….home late. He (finish)………….work at 5 o’clock.

3)I (not understand)………………………this sentence. What…… this word (mean)……

4)Right now I (look)……..…..around the classroom. Minh (write)…………..…in her book.

5)Lien’s friend (have)……..a new bike but he (not like)…………..it very much.

VFill in the blanks with a/an/the if necessary.( 10 points)

1)There is……egg on………. …table.

2)My yard doesn’t have……………..trees.

3)Is your mother staying at…………….…home?

  -Yes.She’s in……………..kitchen.

4)My sister is……….…nurse. She goes to……….work everyday.

5)Are there………….….hotels in your street?

6)Our city has ……………...university and …….……..ancient temple.

VI Read the passage then answer the questions.(5 points)

This is my friend. Her name is Linh. She goes to school from Monday to Saturday. Her school is on Nguyen Cao street and it’s big. It has five floors. Linh’s classroom is on the 3rd floor. Linh is in class 6A. There are thirty-two students in her class.

Linh starts her classesat 2 o’clock in the afternoon and finishes them at 4.30. On Monday she has Math, Literature and English. After school Linh plays badminton,  but her friend, Lien doesn’t play it; she plays volleyball. Linh goes home at 5.30.

1)Where/Linh’s school?.................................................................................................

2)How many/floor/school/have? .....................................................................................

3)Which/class/Linh?

4)What time/Linh/start/classes? ........................................................................................

5)Lien/play/badminton? .....................................................................................................

VII/Find the mistakes and correct them.(15 points)

1)Mr Hien isn’t live in a house in the country.

             A    B            C                 D

2)The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.

       A        B                 C                               D

3)There aren’t a trees to the left of Lan’s house.

      A               B              C                D

4)That’s my sister over there. She stands near the window.

      A                           B                   C              D

5)Do you know how many teachers does your school have?

   A                      B                   C                     D

6.He wants any books on that shelf.

                    A     B      C           D

7 How many teachers there are in your school?

              A           B        C           D

8 They no get up at 6 o’clock.

              A     B     C         D

9. Her garden is big. It’s a garden big.

               A      B         C           D

10. Sorry. You can't speak to Jim now. He's have a bath.

                            A             B                           C       D

11. We go to the library in Monday afternoon.

            A  B                    C            D

12. Mr. Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.

                        A            B          C    D

13 She’d likes a glass of water.

          A      B   C                  D

14. What is the higher mountain in the world?

               A          B            C       D

15I would like some potatos.

     A    B    C                  D

VIII. /Rewrite these sentences with the same meaning(5 points)

1)Mr Binh is going to England by plane. (FLYING)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

2)The stadium is behind the park. (FRONT)                  

à……………………………………………………………………………..

3)Mrs Khanh has a daughter, Nguyet. (MOTHER)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

4)Are there five rooms in Nhung’s house? (HAVE)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

5)My father rides his motorbike to work every day. (BY)

à……………………………………………………………………………..

IX. Give the correct form of the word( 15 points)

1.      There are four……………….in my house (BOOKSHELF).                             

2.      The photocopy is between the ……………….and the drugstore (BAKE).

3.      Is your brother an…………………? (ACT).

4.      Mai’s sister is a……………    ……(SING).

5.      We must be ………………   …when we cross the road (CARE).

6.      This tree has a lot of green ……………     ……(LEAF).

7.      Is your father a………………     …(BUSINESS).

8.      I’m Vietnamese. What’s your………………    …?(NATION).

9.      Air ………………    …is a big problem in many cities in the world (POLLUTE).

10.  Yoko is from Japan. She is ………………       …(JAPAN).

11 Mary likes attending the English .............................................. contests. (SPEAK)

12 My neighborhood is ..................................... for good and cheap restaurants. (FAME)

13 I like the city life because there are many kinds of ....................................... (ENTERTAIN)

14 Lan’s classroom is on the ......................................... floor. (TWO)

15 These children like ........................................ weather. (SUN)

 

 

TEST 4

ĐỀ THI HỌC SINH GIỎI CẤP TRƯỜNG

Năm học 2009- 2010

Môn thi: Tiếng Anh lớp 6

(Thời gian làm bài: 60 phút - không kể lúc giao đề)

 

I. Circle the word that has the underlined letter pronounced differently from the others.

1. a. doctor

b. come

c. brother

d. mother

2. a. he

b. she

c. evening

d. seven

3. a. children

b. ten

c. pen

d. twelve

4. a. morning

b. night

c. evening

d. greeting

5. a. name

b. waste

c. are

d. eraser

II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences

1………………….book is this, yours or mine?

a. What

b. Who

c. Whose

d. Which

2. I………….for school.

a. am never late

b. never am late

c. am late never

d. late am never

3. Don’t forget to put the……………….in the waste- basket.

a. milk bottles

b. bottle milk

c. bottles

d. milks bottles

4. His job is………….

a. driving a bus

b. a bus driver

c. to driver bus

d. bus driving

5. What about…………………..to dinner with me?

a. coming

b. to come

c. come

d. comes

6. This car is different……….mine.

a. with

b. to

c. for

d. from

7. …………present the price of this book is ten thousand dong.

a. At

b. On

c. In

d. For

8. He is only ten, but he eats………………….his father does.

a. much than

b. more than

c. as much as

d. as much than

9. Don’t …………….slowly.

a. walk

b. walks

c. to walk

d. walking

10. ………….books are on the table.

a. There

b. Their

c. They

d. Theirs

11. My friend is going to visit Dalat…………the fifth of May.i

a. on

b. at

c. in

d. to

12. I don’t want……….milk today.

a. any

b. some

c. many

d. no

13. ……..you angry with him?

a. Do

b. Why

c. How

d. Are

14. Hanoi is …………….of Vietnam.

a. capital

b. a capital

c. an capital

d. the capital

15. She is very patient. I think she is a very good…………

a. doer

b. player

c. actor

d. doctor

III. Choose the suitable word from a, b, c, or d to complete the gaps.

1. see           eye

Eat…………..

A. ear

B. face

C. mouth

D. food

2. dark          light

Small……….

A. big

B. bright

C. thin

D. little

3. bring         take

Arrive………..

A. leave

B. carry

C. catch

D. come

4. head           top

Foot………….

A. shoe

B. down

C. bottom

D. under

5. hurry          late

Eat………….

A. hungry

B. thirsty

C. tired

D. full

 

IV. Put a word into the gaps of the passage.

Hoang likes fishing very much. He (1)……….in the river (2)……..….our house (3)………….Sunday afternoon, when he (4)…………no work, he goes down to the river with a little seat and (5)…………..sandwiches and fishes until it is quite dark.  (6)………..are always a (7)………….other people there. They love fishing, too and they all sit there quietly for hours. Sometimes they catch some fish, (8)…………they do not. I (9)…………not like that kind of sports (10)………...I am not patient (kiên nhẫn).

 

V. Arrange these words to make a grammartically meaningful sentences.

1. house/ a/ Hoa/ lake/ near/ a/ lives/ Mrs/ in.

………………………………………………………………………….

2. Lan/empty/bottles/ cans/ and/ collects/ them/ recycles/ and

……………………………………………………………………………

3. are/ to/ going/ we/ Hue/ this/ vacation/ visit/ summer/

…………………………………………………………………………

4. cold/ they/ when/ often/ volleyball/ it/ play/ is/ do?

…………………………………………………………………

5. a/ I/ sandwich/ glass/ lemon/ like/ of/ would/ juice/ a/ and

……………………………………………………………………….

 

VI. Put the verb in a correct tense

1. Now they (watch)……………………… TV in their bedroom.

2. Tomorrow the boys (have)………………… a picnic by the bank.

3. Phong (like)…………….. (jog) …………………..very much.

4. …………Kien (go)……………………. to school at 6.45 in the morning?

 

VII. Put a, an, the, any into the gaps

1. Do you live in……………apartment in town? - No. We live in………..house in………country.

2. There aren’t …………...two star hotels in Thai hoa Twon.

3. Is there………….vegetable garden in front of ……….yard?

4. What’s that? – It’s ……….eraser.

5. Are there………….lakes in your city?

6. Near ………...river, there is …………paddy field.

 

 

 

TEST 5

ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT HỌC SINH GIỎI

 NĂM HỌC 2010 -2011
MÔN: Tiếng Anh 6

 

A. Pronunciation.
 Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the others.
1. A. call                     B. fall                          C. shall                        D. wall
2. A. clown                 B. down                      C. own                         D. town
3. A. above                  B. glove                       C. love                         D. move
4. A. cow                     B. show                       C. know                       D. throw
5. A. clear                   B. dear                         C. hear                         D. pear
6. A. thank                  B. that                         C. this                          D. those
7. A. cost                     B. most                        C. post                         D. roast
8. A. arm                     B. charm                     C. farm                        D. warm
9. A. come                   B. home                       C. some                       D. none
10. A. cow                   B. now                         C. how                         D. show
B. Vocabulary & grammar.
I. Choose the best answer.

1. His lips aren’t full. They are ………………….. ( fat, weak, thin, long)
2. Lemonade, apple juice, soda and ……………. are cold drinks ( beans, noodles, vegetables, iced tea)
3. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it ………….. a week ( once, twice, two times, three times)
4. Lan and Nam often listen to music in …………. free time. ( your, his, her, their)
5. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer. She …………. plays soccer. ( always, usually, never, often)
6. He wants ………..…. an engineer. ( to be, being, be, is)
7. They would like some milk …………… dinner. ( in, at, for, of)
8. Minh often goes …………. in the mountains on the weekend. ( walking, travel, walk, to walk)
9. She listens to music ……..…….. a week ( two days, always, twice, every )
10. ………………. I help you? Yes. I’d like some beef. ( Do, Am, Would, Can)
II. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the verb in brackets.
1. My sister always (wear) nice clothes for work. Today she (wear)........... a blue jacket and shirt
2. Why you (buy).............. so much food ?    - Because we ( have) ..............a party tonight,
3. That film ( come)............... to the local cinema next week. You ( want)............ to see it?
4. It ( not rain ) ..........right now. The sun ( shine )................ and the sky is blue.
5. Alice ( not take) .................the bus to school every day. She usually ( walk).......... instead
III. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in brackets.
1. There are four ………… in my house.                                                       bookshelf.
2. The photocopy is between the ………… and the drugstore.                     bake
3. Is your brother an……………..?                                                                act
4. Mai's sister is a ………………..                                                                 sing
5. We must be …………….. when we cross the road.                                  care
6. This tree has a lot of green ……………….                                               leaf
7. Is your father a ………………. ?                                                               business
8. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your …………… ?                                             nation
9. Air ....... is a big problem in many cities in the world.                               pollute
10. Yoko is from Japan. She is ………………                                              Japan
IV. Find and correct the mistakes.
1. My mother is going to the market with my
2. Mr. Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.
3. How many homework does Lan have every day?
4. The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.
5. I'm twenty-one year old and I' m a student.
6. A lot of my friends play soccer, but not much of them play tennis.
7. Minh and his father are going to plant trees in the garden now.
8. Are they many students in your class?
C. Reading.
I. Complete the passage. Fill in each gap with a suitable word given
.

finishes   /   are    /   students    /    has    /    big    /    in    /    yard   /   grade    /    on    /    street

Here is a photo of my school. It’s a ……(1)…. school. It is …..(2) … the city. It’s on Nguyen Hue   …..(3)… . In my school, there is a big ...(4) … and there ….(5) ….. a lot of trees around it. My  school …….(6) …. three floors and forty classrooms with 1,700 ….(7) …. My classroom is ….(8)…. the second floor. I’m in …..(9) …… 6, class 6A. Our class starts at 7.00 and …..(10) …… at 11.30

II. Read the passage and then fill True(T) or False(F) for each sentence below.

            It’s six o’clock in the evening. Many people are at home. They are having dinner. They are watching T.V. They are listening to music. But Mrs. Bich is going to the work. She’s a doctor and she works at night in the hospital. Today she’s late. The hospital is not in her neighborhood so she usually goes by car. Mrs. Bich is in her car now. She’s driving fast. She should slow down but she must be at work by six thirty. A policeman stops her. “ You are driving too fast !” he says. You are going to have an accident. It’s six thirty. Mrs. Bich is not at the hospital. She’s at the police station. Her car must stay there for fourteen days.

1. Many people are not working 6. She is late for work
2. Mrs. Bich comes home every evening at six 7. She is a dangerous driver
3. Mrs. Bich is a night doctor 8. A policeman doesn’t keep her car
4. The hospital is near her house 9. She arrives at the hospital at 6.30
5. She goes to work by motorbike 10. She isn’t going to drive her car for two weeks
III. Read the passage and answer the questions.
Salina lives in a village in Africa. Her day starts at 4 o’clock. She gets up, and she walks three kilometers to the river. She collects some water, and carries it back to her house. The water is very heavy. It isn’t clean but there isn’t any water in the village. Salina doesn’t go to school. She can’t read or write. She helps her mother in the house.
• Questions:
1. Where does Salina live?
2. What does Salina do after she gets up?
3. Is the water clean?
4. Can Salina read?
5. Where does Salina help her mother?
6. What does she collect?
7. Does Salina go to school?
8. Is the water very heavy?
D. Writing.
I. Rearrange the following sentences into meaningful sentences.

1. newspaper / a / day / I / read / every.

2. Lunch / a / grandfather / after / always / sleep / has.

3. famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.

4. listen / I / the / my / car / radio / usually / in / to.

  ……………………………………………………………….

5. face / eyes / big / Lan / round / black / a / and / has.

  …………………………………………………………………

6. there / house / many / of / your / how / cans / are / food / in ?

  ………………………………………………………………..
II. Rewrite each of the following sentences, beginning with the words given
1. Does your class have twenty-five students?
    Are there..........................................?
2. How much does a bowl of noodles cost?
    How much is....................................?
3. The work is very hard and he can’t do it.
    This work is too................................
4. Mr. Minh has a daughter, Lan .
    Mr. Minh is .......................................
5. What is the width of this river?
    How............................................... ..?
6. My mother often drives to work.
    My mother often goes ....................
7. What is the price of a cake and an orange?
    How............................................... ..?
8. That book belongs to Nam.
   That is........................................

 

 

TEST 6

 NĂM HỌC 2010 -2011
MÔN: Tiếng Anh 6

Section a : phonetics

 I.  Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others 

1. A.    brush               B. music                      C. truck                       D. bus.

2. A. lettuce                 B. tube                         C. music                      D. student

3. A. plays                   B. says                         C. days                        D. stays.

4. A. tents                   B. books                      C. lamps                      D. windows

5. A. watches             B. lives.                       C. brushes                   D. classes    .                                                                                                                                                               6. A. station                 B .pollution                 C. question                  D. intersection

7. A. teacher                B. children                  C.  lunch                      D. school.

8. A. arm                     B. park                        C. farm                        D. warm

9. A. come                   B. home                       C. some                       D. love

10. A. know                B. now                        C. how                        D. shower

     Section b : vocabulary and grammar

 I.  Choose the word or phrase which best completes each sentence  

  1. What about…………..a cup of coffee?

A. have                        B. having                     C. you have                 D. do you

  1. Let’s …………….to the movies.

A. goes                                    B. go               C. to go                       D. going

  1. ……..does she go jogging? - Once a week.

A. How often              B. How long                C. How about              D. How

  1. He …….to the movie.

A. goes often              B. often goes               C. go often                  D. is often

  1. Tuan and I……..badminton in the yard.

       A. playing       B. is playing                            C. are playing              D. am playing

6.       This sign says “stop!”. We ……..go straight ahead.

     A. can                     B. don’t can                      C. must                        D. must not

7.       Nam is ……..something on his book.

     A. writing         B. written                                C. write                       D. writes

8.       Are there……..stores on your street?

     A. much                       B. a lot                  C. any                           D. some 

9.       - ……..do you go to school?   – I go there on foot.

    A. How                  B. By what                          C. How many              D. How by

10.   How many classrooms …………..in your school?

    A. there are                    B. are there                      C.    there has                      D. have there

II Each sentece has a mistake. Find and correct it

1. I always clean my tooth after every meal .

…………………………………………………….

2.  Most people doesn’t work on Sunday.

……………………………………………………

3. Mr. Lan doesn’t lives in Vietnam .

…………………………………………………..

4. What time are your classes start ?

…………………………………………………….

5. Mai morning begins very late.

……………………………………………

6. Do you go to school in Monday?

…………………………………………………

7. Ba often does his homeworks in the evening.

……………………………………………………………..

8. When this movie finish?

………………………………………………………………………..

9. One of my friends have two eggs and some bread for breakfast.

……………………………………………………………………………….

10. Would you like an apple or any oranges ?

………………………………………………………………………

III. Give the correct forms of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentences below.

1.  Ba usually ( listen) ……… to the teacher in class, but he ( not listen ) …     ………..now .

2.  Where is your mother?- She( be) … . in the bathroom. She (brush) … ….  ……..his teeth.

3……..your children( go ) … …to school by bus every day?

4.  She (ride) ………………… her bike to school now.

5.  Oh, no! It (rain) ................... We can’t play tennis. It always (rain) ............. a lot in April.

6. - What ………your son usally (have) ................for breakfast?

- He usually (eat) .................. a carrot and (drink) ................. a glass of cold water.

7. - What ……..your mother ( do ) ……………………..this summer vacation?                                             - She (visit)............. ………………………my grandparents in Vinh city.

8.  He (not ,go)......................... to  the movies on Sunday nights.

9.  Look! She (come).................................our classroom.

10.  What (be) ………..there (drink) ............................for dinner?

11.  What … …..Mr. Allen (do) … ……….? - He (be) …….. a teacher.

12.  Can we (play) … ………..soccer on the streets?

 

Section c : reading

 

I.                   Read the text and choose the best answer to complete each sentences below.

                                                           My house

            I live in a house near the sea. It is ...(1)... old house, about 100 years old and...(2)... very small. There are two bed rooms upstairs...(3)... no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs ... (4)... the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden...(5)... the house. The garden...(6)... down to the beach and in spring and summer...(7)... flowers every where. I like alone...(8)... my dog, Reck, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with...(9)...

I love my house for... (10)... reasons the garden, the flowers in summer, the fier in winter, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.

1.

A. a

B. an

C. the

D. any

2.

A. It's

B. It

C. there's

D. They're

3.

A. and

B. or

C. but

D. too

4.

A. between

B. next

C. near to

D. next to

5.

A. in front

B. front of

C. of front in

D. in front of

6.

A. go

B. going

C. goes

D. to go

7.

A. there are

B. they are

C. these are

D. those are

8.

A. for

B. of

C. on

D. with

9.

A. me

B. I

C. my

D. I'm

10.

A. a

B. any

C. many

D. a lot

 

II.  Fill in each gap with one suitable word in the following passage.

I have a  very close friend. Her name is Mai. She is eleven years old __(1)__ she is in grade six. She__(2)__ speak English. She has English __(3)__ Tuesday, Thursday and Friday. She can also __(4)__ the piano. In her room, __(5)__ is a piano and some books. Every day she gets up at six. She __(6)__ breakfast at six thirty and goes to school at a __ (7)__ to seven. She has her __(8)__ from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she __(9)__back home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now and Nga is in her room. She __(10)__ doing her homework.

 

Section d  : writing 

  I.Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.

1. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms ?

     Are ……………………………………….........................?

2. Mr Minh has a son, Trung.                                                

      Mr Minh ...................................

3. Huyen walks to school every morning.                 

     Huyen goes .........................................................

4. The girls are beautiful.

     They’re ………………………………………………….

5. My father usually drives to work.

     My father usually goes …………………………………………

6. How much is a bowl of noodles ?

    How much does.....................................................................................

7. They are Hoa and Hai.

    Their……………………………………………………..

8. I like beef and vegetables.

    Beef …………………………………………..

9. The bookstore is to the right of the museum.

    The museum………………………………………………

10. We have English class at 7.15.

      Our English class……………………………………..

 

 II.Write a passage (about 80 – 100 words) telling about your plan in this summer vacation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 7

ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT HỌC SINH GIỎI

NĂM HỌC 2010 - 2011

MÔN : Tiếng Anh  Lớp 6

 

I. Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently in each word group below

1. A. lunch                  B. bench                     C. couch                     D. chemistry

2. A. bank                   B. stadium                  C. factory                   D. math

3. A. museum             B. unload                    C. bus                         D. truck

4. A. accident             B. travel                      C. ahead                     D. bank

5. A. books                 B. radios                     C. cameras                  D. teachers

 

II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the following sentences:

1. The toy store is .................... the bookstore and the drugstore.

A. on                           B. in                            C. of                            D. between

2. The road sign says “ No walking”. We .................... walk here.

A. not can                    B. not must                  C. mustnt                   D. arent

3. My father is an ..................... . He works in a factory.

A. doctor                     B. engineer                  C. teacher                    D. farmer

4. I see some people at the bus – stop. Are they ......................... for the bus?

A. waiting                   B. to wait                    C. wait                        D. waits.

5. My grandparents live in the countryside ................. my aunt.

A. on                           B. of                            C. at                            D. with

6. Please go and ............................. a bath.

A. wash                       B. make                       C. have                        D. do

7. She has ....................................................

A. black long hair       B. hair black long        C. long black hair        D. black hair long

8. My father always goes .................... a walk in the early morning.

A. to                            B. on                           C. in                            D. for

9. This student is very good ............................ Math.

A. at                            B. in                            C. with                        D. to

10. It isnt very far so we want to go ...................... foot.

A. at                            B. with                        C. to                            D. on

11. Im just going to ................. a photo of the town square.

A. take                        B. make                       C. paint                       D. draw

12. I .................. German quite well, but my wife cant.

A. am speaking           B. can                          C. can speak                D. know speak

13. ........................... likes John. He is very popular.

A. Everyone                B. All people               C. Nobody                  D. Anyone

14. You must be ................. at the intersection.

A. care                         B. careful                    C. careless                   D. caring

15. Listen! The news on the radio .................. very interesting.

A. are                          B. has                          C. is                             D. am.

16. He always feels ..................... in the morning.

A. sleeping                  B. sleepy                     C. sleep                       D. asleep

17. What about ................. to the cinema by bike ?

A. to go                       B. is going                   C. go                           D. going

18. It is a very important meeting. You .................................... late.

A. mustnt be               B. mustnt                   C. mustnt goes           D. mustnt go

19. David and Jim often listen to music in ....................... free time.

            A. your                        B. his                           C. her                          D. their

20. John often ........................ in the river in the fall.

            A. go shopping            B. go camping             C. goes fishing            D. go jogging

 

III. Supply the correct tense or form of the verb in brackets

1. Be quiet ! The baby (sleep).....................................................

2. It ( rain) ........... very much in the summer. It ( not rain)................. now.

3. I see that you (wear) ................ your best clothes.

4. My mother (cook)........... some food in the kitchen at present. She always (cook)......... in the morning.

5. She ( not want)............... to answer the phone because she (do)............... the cooking.

6. What about (go)................... to the zoo this Sunday?                    – Good idea!

7. This sign says “No left turn”. You mustnt (turn)..........................left.

 

IV. Read the passage and choose the best answer for each question

Jane is a gymnast. She is very pretty. She is tall and thin. She is light but she isnt weak. She has physical strength. She has an oval and lovely face. She has long black hair and brown eyes. She has a small mouth. Her teeth are also small and white. Everybody loves her because she always helps the others.

1. What does Jane do ?

A. teacher                          B. gymnast                C. doctor                D. dentist

2. Whats she like ?

A. tall and slim                  B. tall and thick        C. tall and fat          D. tall and short

3. She is ....................................

A. light and weak             B. light but strong      C. thin and weak     D. tall and weak

4. What color are her eyes ?

A. black                            B. grey                       C. light                    D. brown

5. Everybody loves her because ......................................................

A. she always helps the others                           B. she always asks the others for help

C. she is tall, thin and strong                              D. she is beautiful.

 

V. Give the correct form of the word in capital letters given to complete the sentences

1. Im looking for a .....................................gift for an old lady.                                SUIT

2. This coffee is too ................................... to drink.                                                  HEAT

3. Do you know what the ........................ of the river ? .                                           DEEP

4. There is a ................................... of fruits in Vietnam                                            VARY

5. This river is the ...................... river in Vietnam.                                                   LONG

6. My mother goes .......................... twice a week.                                                    SHOP

7. They are learning ......................... because they will go to Berlin next year         GERMANY

8. In math I am ............................... than you.                                                            BAD

9. His brother is strong and ...................................                                                     GOOD-LOOK

10. In the library we read about ....................... things.                                              WONDER   

 

VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one,beginning with the given words or phrases

1. How about going to the zoo?

Lets ………………………………………………………………………………………..

2. How much are these shoes?

How much do …………………………………………………………………………….?

3. Close your book, please!

Dont ……………………………………………………………………………………....

4. The Nile River is longer than the Mekong River

The Mekong River................ ……………………………………………………………

5. We have a lot of work to do.

There is................ …………………………………………………………………………

6. You have six children

You have a big ........ ………………………………………………………………………

7. On the table are 2 cups of tea

There are …………………………………………………………………………………

8. He often flies to Bangkok

He often goes ……………………………………………………………………………

9. Our house is far from the school.

Our house is not ………………………………………………………………………….

10. How many oranges do you want ?

How many oranges would......…………………………………………………………… ?

 

VII. Each of the following sentences has a mistake. Underline the mistake and correct it

1. Can you to go to the market for me ?                                             1…………………………

2. My son is so good on mathematics.                                                2…………………………

3. I am knowing all of them.                                                               3…………………………

4. How many butter would you like ?.                                               4…………………………

5. Mary often has a glass of milk and some bread at breakfast          5……………..................

6. We dont have homeworks today                                                   6………………………..

7. They have a cup of tea at the moment.                                           7. ....................................

8. I would like buying a packet of tea and a tube of toothpaste.        8.....................................

9. Mai always helps her mother in the housework.                            9......................................

10. He is listen to music now.                                                             10....................................

 

VIII. Fill in each numbered blank with ONE suitable word to complete the passage

I……(1)........ a big breakfast, but on weekdays I dont have time to cook,…….. (2).......... I have to go to work. So I just have ………(3).........  toast and two cups of tea. I have …….(4).......... at about one oclock. I usually go to the pub …….(5).......... some of my friends. I have a hamburger and French fries or something like that. But I dont usually drink ……..(6)......... beer or wine. I …..(7)........... work in the afternoon if I drink alcohol at …….(8)........., so I drink water or lemonade. I have dinner at about seven oclock. I dont like …….(9).........., so I usually buy something on the way home – a pizza, fish and chips, or some Chinese food. ……..(10)............ dinner I usually go to the pub and have a few pints of beer.

IX. Write a paragraph tell about your school ( about 80 – 100 word) ( Viết một đoạn văn kể về trường học của bạn. Khoảng 80 đến 100 từ - 15 điểm)

 

 

 

TEST 8

Part I. In this part of the test you must choose the word or phrase of words which best completes each of the following sentences . The first sentence has been done for you as an example .( 10ms )

00. We shouldn’t _____ trash on the street .

A. throwing                 B. to throw                              C. throws                                D. throw

01. Lemonade , apple juice , soda and ______ are cold drinks .

A. beans                      B. noodles                               C. vegetables               D. iced tea

02. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday . We have it _____ a week .

A. once                        B. twice                                   C. two times                            D. three times

03. Ngoc and Yen often do aerobic in ____ free time .

A. your                        B. his                                       C. her                                      D. their

04. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer . She ____ plays soccer .

A. always                    B. usually                                C. never                                   D. often

05. He wants ____ an engineer .

A. to be                       B. being                                   C. be                                        D. is

06. They would like some milk _____ dinner .

A. in                            B. at                                        C. for                                       D. of

07. Minh often goes _____ in the mountain on the weekend .

A. walking                  B. walks                                  C. walk                                    D. to walk

08. My father is _____ man .

A. a old                       B. an old                                 C. not young                           D. not very young

09. I’m tired . I’d like ______ .

A. sit down                 B. sitting down                       C. to sit down             D. to sitting down

10. Do you have any toothpaste ? I’d like a large _____ .

A. tube            B. roll                                      C. bar                                      D. tin

Your Answer .

Qs

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

An

D

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Part II. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in bracket . The first sentence has been done for you as an example . ( 10 ms )

00. She is a _______ .                                                                                     ( teach )

01. There are four ______ in my house .                                                                    ( bookshelf )

02. The photocopy store is between the _____ and the drugstore .                           ( bake )

03. Is your brother an _____ ?                                                                                    ( act )

04. Mai’s sister is a _____ .                                                                                        ( sing )

05. We must be _____ when we cross the road .                                                       ( care )

06. This tree has a lot of green _____ .                                                                      ( leaf )

07. Is his father a ______ .                                                                                         ( business )

08. I’m Vietnamese . What’s your ______ ?                                                              ( nation )

09. Air _____ is a big problem in many cities in the world .                                     ( pollute )

10. Yoko is from Japan . She is ______ .                                                                   ( Japan )

Part III. Read the passage and choose (A,B,C,D) that best answers each of the questions about it(30ms)

My name is Petty  and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice. For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s  at  about 1.30 .

We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday we often go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.

   1/ Petty and her husband work in 

       A/offices                B/factories                       C/ hospitals                    D/ clinics

   2/Petty and Phil have

       A/a big breakfast                                B/    a light  breakfast           

      C/ breakfast with meat                        D/   breakfast with eggs                 

   3/ What do they have for lunch  ?

A/ salad and sandwich                        B /salad and soup

C /fish  and soup                                 D/ sandwich and fish 

   4/What do they drink for dinner  ?

      A/iced tea                           B/ iced coffee           C/ soda                       D/   orange juice

  5/ What time do they usually have dinner ?

      A/6.30                                 B/7.15                  C /7.30 .                        D/ 8.00

  6/ Where  do they have dinner on Saturday evenings ?

A/at home                                          B/at a hotel

           C /at their friend’s house                   D/ at a restaurant 

PartIV. Fill each of the numbered blanks in the passage . Use only one word for each space .(10ms)

listen               Mondays       teach                have              my

movie              on                    lunch                usually           small

I live in  a   …(1)…. house in Hanoi .I ….(2)……..English at a school there .I usually ….(3)…….. breakfast at seven o’clock in the morning  and I have ……..(4)…. ……at twelve o’clock in  the canteen of the school. I teach ……(5)……students in the morning . I teach them dialogues ..(6)…. Wednesdays and Fridays .On …….. ….(7)… I teach them grammar .In the evening I …8)…. stay at home and  …(9)… to the radio . I sometimes go to the ……(10)…. .I always go to bed at ten o’clock

Part V. Complete the passage and answer the questions (15ms).

 

winter              are                  night     In       but                                                   

cold                 seasons            are                  go         

There are four (1) ……. in a year. They  …(2)……. spring, summer, fall and ..…(3)…  . In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold …(4)….not very cold. There …(5)……..many flowers in the spring.  ……(6)….. the summer, the day is long and the night is short .People often ..(7)…….swimming in this season. The fall is the season of fruits. In the winter, it’s usually very  ……(8)……. The day is short and the ………(9)………is long .

  1. How many seasons are there in a year ?

...............................................................................

  1. What are they ?

......................................................................................

  1. Is it usually warm in the spring ?

...............................................................................

  1. What are there in the spring ?

....................................................................................

  1. What do people often do in the summer ?

..........................................................................

  1. Is the day long or short in the summer ?

............................................................................

 Part VI.Read the  passage and check T/F (10ms)

                Hello! My name is Phong. I’m twelve years old and I’m in grade 6. My school is in the country. It’s a small school. My school has two floors and sixteen classrooms. My classroom is on the first floor. There are thirty five students in my class. Every morning I get up at six o’clock. I get dressed, brush my teeth and wash my face. I have breakfast at six twenty and go to school at six forty.

  1. Phong is twelve years old .                
  2. Phong’s school is in the city              
  3. There are sixty classrooms in Phong’s school  .
  4. Phong’s classroom  is on the second floor .
  5. His class has 53 students .                 
  6. He has breakfast at 6.30                     

7.   He is  in grade 6

8.   Phong’s school is small

9.   Phong brushes his teeth at 6.20

10. He goes to school at 6.40

PartVII. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it has the similar meaning to the first .(30ms)

1.This school is big  .

 ->It …………………. .

2. She goes to school on foot .

->She…………………………..

3. There are four rooms  in my house .

->My house  …………………………..

4. I go to school at six thirty

.->I go to school ……………………….

5.She likes noodles  .

->Her favorite …………………………….

6. The movie  theater  is  in front of  the hotel .

->The hotel ……………………………….

Part VIII. Putting the words in the correct order to make  the meaningful  sentences.(25ms)

  1. father / his /time /does /often / what /free /your /in /do ?

…………………………………………………………………..

  1. sports / play /the /which /he /weekend /does /on ?

………………………………………………………………….

  1. your / drink / brother’s /what / favorite /is ?

………………………………………………………………

  1. small / think /sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has .

………………………………………………………………

  1. an/ the / city / apartment / in / we / in /live

………………………………………………………………

Part  IX.Write a paragraph about Jane using the given cues  .(20ms)

            Jane / gymnast .She/pretty .She/ tall /thin .She /light /but she  / not/week .She /oval /lovely face .She /long /black /hair /brown eyes .She/ small mouth .Her teeth /small / white .Everyone /love her because she/ always help/ others .

           

 

TEST 9

 THI KHẢO SÁT HỌC SINH GIỎI LẦN 2

MÔN TIẾNG ANH 6

Thời gian làm bài 120 phút không kể thời gian phát đề

 

 

 

 ( Đề thi gồm 4 trang thí sinh làm bài vào đề thi này)

I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.( 1 điểm)

1.         A hats                          B pens                         C cats                          D books          

2.         A bus                           B museum                   C drug                        D lunch                      

3.         A heavy                       B leave                       C head                         D ready                      

4.         A fly                           B hungry                     C usually                     D early           

5.         A brother                     B these                        C thank                       D that             

6.         A door                         B book                        C look                         D cook           

7.         A read                         B teacher                     C near                          D eat               

8.         A face                          B small                        C grade                        D late             

9.         A  twice                       B swim                        C skip                          D picnic                      

10.       A arm                          B charm                       C farm                         D warm                      

II. Chọn phương án đúng nhất điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau.(3 điểm)

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s________ home.

A. go                           B. to go                       C. going                      D. goes

2. Tuan and I________ badminton in the yard.

A. playing                   B. is playing                C. are playing  D. am playing

3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ________ go straight ahead.

A. can                          B. don’t can                C. must                        D. must not

4. They are going to New York ________  plane.

A. in                            B. by                           C. with            D. on

5. Viet is ________ something on his book.

A. writing                    B. writting                   C. wrote                      D. writes

6. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any                          D. the

7. My sister and I ________  television in the living room now.

A. am watching           B. are watching           C. is watching D. watching

8. ________ do you go to school? .  I walk.

A. How                       B. By what                  C. How many  D. How by

9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” .  “No, ________”

A. she not plays           B. she don’t                C. she isn’t                  D. she doesn’t

10. How many floors ________ in your school?

A. there are                 B. there has                 C. are there                  D. have there

11. She is not doing __________ in the garden, just walking about.

A. anything                 B. nothing                   C. something   D. one thing

12. It is twelve o’clock, Mai Anh. Let’s ________ home

A. goes                        B. to go                       C. going                      D. go

13. These are my note books, and those are ________

A. you             B. your                        C. yours                       D. your’s

14. Nam usually goes ________ after school.

A. to fishing                B. home                       C. the cinema D. house

15. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any              D. the

16. ________do you get there? – We walk, of course.

A. Why                       B. What                       C. How by                   D. How

17. What time ________ on television?

A. is the news B. are the news           C. is news                    D. are news

18. I am very tired. .  ________.

A. Me too                    B. for me the same      C. Also me                  D. I also

19. Don’t be late ________ your school.

A. on                           B. at                             C. to                            D. for

20. I don’t want much sugar in my coffee. Just _______ please.

A. little                        B. a little                     C. few             D. a few

21. ________ is that? ~ It’s a pencil.

A. How many B. How                        C. Who                        D. What

22. Is this an ________?

A. ruler                        B. book                       C. eraser                      D. pen

23. I am  ________, so I don’t want to eat any more.

            A. hungry                    B. thirsty                     C. full                          D. small

24. ________do you work?   .  I work at a school.

            A. What                      B. Where                     C. When                      D. How

25. I’m going to the ________now. I want to buy some bread.

            A. post office              B. drugstore                C. bakery                     D. toystore

26. Is this her ________?

            A. erasers                    B. books                      C. an eraser                 D. eraser

27. The opposite of “weak” is ________.

            A. thin             B. small                       C. strong                     D. heavy

28.  She doesn’t have ________friends at school.

            A. a                             B. some                       C. many                       D. much

29.  ________long or short?

            A. Does Mai have hair                                    B. Is Mai’s hair

            C. Does Mai’s hair have                                 D. Is hair of Mai

30. I need  a large ________of toothpaste.

            A. bar                          B. can                          C. tube            D. box

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc(2 điểm)

a.       I (1 - not like)  …………… coffee very much.

b.      Mrs. Nga (2 - be) ……………  a doctor. She (3 - work) …………… in a hospital.

c.       Lan (4 - visit)……………  Hue this summer vacation.

d.      What you (5 - do) ……………  now? ~ I (6 - do) …………… my home work

e.       There (7 - be) …………… some milk in the fridge.

f.        Look! The plane is flying  towards the airport. It (8 - land)……………

g.      My father (9 - watch) …………… TV in the living room. He often (10 - watch) …………… TV in the evening.

IV. Sử dụng từ loại đúng của các từ cho sẵn để hoàn thành câu(2 điểm)

1.      It’s very …………… in the city.                                                  (noise)

2.      There is a …………… next to my house.                                    (bake)

3.      She is a …………… of English.                                                  (teach)

4.      I brush my …………… twice a day.                                            (tooth)

5.      Long goes …………… at the weekend.                                      (sail)

6.      Their house is on the …………… floor of the building. (five)

7.      Thai Binh is …………… than Hanoi.                              ( small)

8.      Do you …………… play video games?.                         (usual)

9.      This is the …………… house in my village.                          (old)

10.  Peter ……………… a very big truck.                                          (driver)

V. Điền vào chỗ trống bằng 1 giới từ thích hợp( 1 điểm)

a.       There are trees (1)…………… my house.

b.      Lee is Chinese. He is (2)…………… China.

c.       She lives (3)…………… Hanoi (4)…………… her aunt and uncle.

d.      The cat is not on the table. It’s (5)…………… the table.

e.       I often listen (6)…………… music (7)…………… my free time.

f.        Can I help you? ~ I’d like a tube (8)…………… tooth paste.

g.      We go to school (9)…………… the morning.

h.      Jane often goes to work (10)…………… bus.

VI. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau( 2 điểm)

1.      Thuy goes to school by bus.

 

2.      I am in grade 6.

 

3.      There are four people in his family.

 

4.      Her eyes are brown.

 

5.      It is cool and nice in the fall in my country.

 

6.      They are going to school.

 

7.      Mrs. Trang feels very tired.

8.      Those are peas and beans.

9.      An ice – cream is 4,000 dong.

10.  Marie speaks French.

VII. §iền vào chỗ trống với 1 mạo từ a, an hoặc the vào chỗ trống các câu không cần thì để nguyên

a.       I’d like (1)…………… dozen eggs, pleased.

b.      Math is my favorite (2)…………… subject.

c.       We live in (3)…………… apartment in town.

d.      I want to travel all over (4)…………… world.

e.       His father sometimes goes to (5)……………  work (6)…………… foot.

f.        Can I have (7)…………… apple?

g.      (8)…………… People don’t like him because he is selfish.

h.      Nam is (9)…………… artist. He has (10)…………… studio.

VIII.  Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi( 2 điểm)

1.      My school has over 25 classrooms.

There                                                                         my school.

2.      Miss White’s face is oval. It is small.

Miss White

3.      Jane goes to school on foot.

Jane

4.      What food do you like?.

                                                     favorite

5.      He gets up at five fifteen.

He ………………………….. past

6.      I brush my teeth after breakfast, lunch and dinner.

I                                                                        a day.

7.      What does he do?

                                     job?

8.      Why don’t we go to Dam Sen Park?

What about

9.      The bookstore is to the right of the restaurant

The restaurant is

10.  Carol doesn’t live far from her office.

Carol lives

IX. Tìm 10 lỗi sai trong đoạn văn sau (2 điểm) (tính theo từng dòng)

Miss Lien live in a small house on Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually is breakfast in seven in the morning and she has dinner at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches his students in the morning. She teaches them dialogue on Wednesday to Friday. On Mondays, she teach them grammar. In the evening, she usually stay at home and listens books. She sometimes goes to the movies theater. She always go to bed at ten o’clock.

X. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống (1 điểm)

I have a very close friend. Her name is Nga. She is twelve years old (1) …………… she is in grade six. She (2) …………… speak English. She has English (3) …………… Tuesday and Friday. She can also (4) …………… the piano. In her room, (5) …………… is a piano and some books. Everyday she gets up at six. She (6) …………… breakfast at 6.30 and goes to  school at a (7) …………… to seven. She has her (8) …………… from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she (9) …………… home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now. Nga is in her room. She is (10) …………… the piano.

XI. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa (1 điểm)

1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.

……………………………………………………………………………………………

2. a / plays   / badminton / Paul / week / twice.

……………………………………………………………………………………………

3. like / the / weather / fall/ what / is / the / in?

……………………………………………………………………………………………

4. building / tallest / in / this / my city / the / is.                                                                                                  

……………………………………………………………………………………………

5. good / the/ there /let’s / and/ time / beach / go / have / to / a.

……………………………………………………………………………………………

6. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has.

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

7. hot / when / I/ go swimming / it / is.

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

8. camping / often / do / how / you / go?

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………

10. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world/ river.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 10

I. Tìm một từ không cùng nhóm với các từ còn lại (1đ)

1. A.month                  B.seventh                    C.ninth                        D.eighth

2.A.geography             B. housework              C.math                        D.English

3.A.read                      B. watch                      C.book                        D.write

4.A.listening               B.working                   C. playing                   D.morning

II. Viết từ trái nghĩa của những từ sau đây  (1đ)

5.black

6.long

7.heavy

8.hungry

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ( 2 đ)

9.Trang usually (listen ) ………to the teacher in the class .

10. Nam (look ) ……………… out of the window at the moment.

11.Where’s your father ? He (be)…………..in the bathroom.

12…………your children (go)…………..to school by bus everyday?

13.There ( be) ………many flowers in our garden.

14.Every day Mr.Hung (not drive) …………….to work.

15. What is Mai ( do) ………….now?

16.We are tired and we’d like ( sit) …….down.

IV. Mỗi câu sau có một lỗi sai , hãy sửa lại cho đúng(1,5 đ)

17.How much rice and how many beef do you want?

18.She’d like a dozen eggs and any vegetables.

19.Can you to go to the supermarket for me ,Hoa ?

20.We need eight hundred gram of beef.

21.What would you like buying at the canteen ?

22.There is a apple on the table.

V. Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại sau đây ( 3 đ)

Lien : Hello, Mai (23)………………………………………..everyday ?

Mai : I get up at a quarter to six

Lien : (24) …………………………………………………..morning ?

Mai : I play badminton.

Lien : (25)…………………………………………………..half past six ?

Mai : No, I don’t. I go to school at six thirty.

Lien : (26)…………………………………………………..today ?

Mai : No, we don’t. We have history on Tuesday and Saturday.

Lien : So (27)………………………………………………………………?

Mai : We have English, geography and math.

Lien : (28)……………………………………………………go jogging ?

Mai : I always go jogging .

 

VI. Đọc đoạn văn sau rồi trả lời các câu hỏi bên dưới ( 1,5đ)

Hello, I’m Trung.This is my school. It is small and old but it is beautiful .Behind the school , there is a large yard. After school in the afternoon we often play soccer there.The yard is clean and there are many trees and flowers. My friends and I sit under these trees every morning to review our lessons. My school has two floors and fifteen classrooms.My classroom is on the first floor. There are forty - three teachers in my school. They are good teachers. I love them and I love my school very much.

Questions :

29. Is Trung’s school big ?

30. What is there behind Trung’s school ?

31. What do Trung and his friends often play after school ?

32. Where do Trung and his friends sit every morning to review their lessons

33. Does his school have two floors ?

34. How many teachers are there in his school ?

VII. Điền một từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống ( 3 đ)

Today is Sunday. (35)……. is fine and warm.Mr Kien’s family are (36)……………at home.They are working in the house now.Mr Kien is cleaning the doors and windows.Nam is helping (37)……………....Mrs Oanh and Hoa (38) …………….in the kitchen.Mrs Oanh is (39) ……….the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables.They are cooking the lunch. They are going to (40) ……….a good lunch together.

VIII. Sắp xếp những từ sau thành câu có nghĩa ( 2đ)

41. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has .

42. Brown’s / round / Mrs / or / is / oval / face ?

43. coffee / aren’t / some / but / there / is / any / apples / there / iced.

44. like / I / wouldn’t / because / bread / not / I’m / hungry.

45. your / drink / brother’s / what / favorite / is ?

46. a / is / Lan’s house / garden / there / big / behind.

47. Ho Chi Minh City / Mrs Oanh / do / family / to / how / and / travel / her ?

48. walking / their / moutain / go / the / they / house / often / in / near.

IX. Dùng từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh ( 2,5 đ)

49. Mrs Hue / children / eating / breakfast / foodstall.

50. your / brother / play / volleyball / yard / now ?

51. Mr / Mrs Thu / travel / work / car / everyday.

52. Nam / friends / go / school / now .

53. Every / afternoon / school / Ba / housework / and / listen / music.

X. Dùng từ gợi ý ở đầu câu thứ hai viết lại câu thứ nhất sao cho nghĩa không thay đổi ( 2,5 đ) .

54. The garden is behind Nam’s classroom.

Nam’s classroom ……………………………………………………………………..

55.Tom drives to work every morning .

Tom travels …………………………………………………………………………..

56.There are four people in her family

Her family …………………………………………………………………………….

57. He goes to work at seven fifteen.

He goes to work at a ………………………………………………………………….

58.This box has twelve packets of tea.

There …………………… ……………………………………………………………..

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 11

Question I.  Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others 

1. A.    brush               B. music                      C. truck                       D. bus.

2. A. lettuce                 B. tube                         C. music                      D. student

3. A. plays                   B. says                         C. days                        D. stays.

4. A. tents                   B. books                      C. lamps                      D. windows

5. A. watches             B. lives.                       C. brushes                   D. classes    .                                                                                                                                                               6. A. station                 B .pollution                 C. question                  D. intersection

7. A. teacher                B. children                  C.  lunch                      D. school.

8. A. arm                     B. park                        C. farm                        D. warm

9. A. come                   B. home                       C. some                       D. love

10. A. know                B. now                        C. how                        D. shower

 

Question II. Vòng tròn chữ cái A, B, C hoặc D thay cho từ em cho là đúng nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau đây (1.0 điểm)

1. 

2. My friends ………………. English on Monday and Friday.

            A. not have                 B. isn’t have                C. don’t have              D. doesn’t have

3. I am  ……….., so I don’t want to eat any more.

            A. hungry                    B. thirsty                     C. full                          D. small

4. Is this her …………………?

            A. erasers                    B. books                      C. an eraser                 D. eraser

5.  ………………… long or short?

            A. Does Mai have hair                                    B. Is Mai’s hair

            C. Does Mai’s hair have                                 D. Is hair of Mai

6. It's seven thirty and Minh is late…………….. school.

           A. for                           B. at                             C. to                            D. in

Question III. Hãy  tìm từ thích hợp để hoàn thành các câu sau (1.0 điểm)

1. Mrs Lan is a nurse and her husband is a doctor. They both work in the ________

2. Nga is very thirsty. She wants something to _________.

3. There are many cars ____________ on our roads nowadays.

4. There is a store ________to the restaurant

5. We never go _____________ because we don't have a tent.

6. A :   How ____________ do you go jogging ?- Once a week.

7.  A :  What would you like __________ breakfast?

     B :  I’d like a sandwich and a glass of  milk.

8.  A :  What do you like?

     B:   I like beef. It’s my _____________ food.

Question IV. Mỗi câu sau có ít nhất một lỗi sai. Gạch dưới lỗi sai và viết lại toàn bộ câu đúng (1.0 điểm)

 0. He  don’t like coffee.

            He  doesn’t like coffee.

 

1. We live in 50 Le Hong Phong street

  ...................................................................................................................................

2. Would you like go to the cinema tonight?               

        ..…….………………………………………………………………………………

 3. I’m the younger person in my family.      

………………………………………………………………………………………                       

 4. She’s my friend. She’s from French.        

………………………………………………………………………………………                       

 5. How height is the Petronas Twin Towers?                       

………………………………………………………………………………………

6. In the free time, Hoa often listens to music, goes fishing and play video games.

....................................................................................................................................

7. A:  How many homework does he have?

B:  He has a lot of homework.

.......................................................................................................................

………………………………………………………………………………………

8. How long does Mr Ba travel to work?  _  He travels to work by car.

   .................................................................................................................................

Question V. Điền vào chỗ  trống MỘT từ thích hợp để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau (1.0 điểm)

     This (1)……… Smith’s room. You can see, his room is not very large. (2)………. are two chairs, a table, a bed, a wardrobe (3)……….. a bookshelf in his room. The table is near (4) ……….. window. There is (5) ....... ink- pot, some books and (6) ………  English- Vietnamese dictionary on the table. The bed is on the right. There are also  some books and newspapers on the bed. The wardrobe is opposite the bed. Smith has  many clothes. (7) ………. clothes are all in the wardrobe. The bookshelf is (8)…….. the wall. There are many (9)………. on it.        

Question VI. Đọc đoạn văn và làm các bài tập dưới đây (1.0 điểm)

     Manchester has a population of about five million but it’s not the capital city of Britain. London is the capital and it’s the biggest city in Britain. But Manchester is the wettest! In Manchester, it rains in spring, summer, fall and winter. The city is very noisy. There are a lot of cars and there is a lot of pollution. People drive their cars to work and children take bus to school. There aren’t many bikes or motorbikes because the weather is very cold. Near the city , there are  lots of lakes and mountains. People go walking there on the weekend. Manchester also has a lot of cinemas and theatres so there is always something to do on the weekend .

  1. Đọc kỹ các câu sau và viết T (True) vào câu em cho là đúng và F(false) vào câu sai  so với đoạn văn trên.

Ví dụ: Manchester has a population of about five million.             T              

1. Manchester is the capital city of Britain.                   ______

2. Manchester is very quiet.                                     ______

3. Children go to school by bus in Manchester              ______

4. There are a lot of cinemas and theatres in Manchester        ______

  1. Dưạ vào đon văn trên tr li các câu hi sau :

1. Is Manchester bigger than London ?........................................................

2. What’s the weather like in winter in Manchester ?.................................

3. How do people go to work ?.......................................................................

4. What do people do on the weekend ?.........................................................

Question VII. Sắp xếp lại các câu sau thành đoạn hội thoại (câu cuối cùng đã được làm) (1.0 điểm)

a.   Yes. I need some eggs.

b.   A kilo, please.

c.    How much do you want ?

d.    A kilo . Do you want any thing else ?

e.    A dozen please. Thank you. Good bye.

f.    How many do you want ?

g.    I’d like some sugar .

h.    Can I help you ?

i.    Good bye

1.____ , 2. ____ , 3. ____ , 4. ____ , 5. ____ , 6. ____ , 7. ____ , 8. ____ , 9.   i

Question VIII. Hãy cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc dể hoàn thành mỗi câu sau (2.0 điểm)

        0. She ...... a student (be)                   She is a student

1. She is very..................................                                  (beauty).

2. Mai’s sister is a ..................... .                                     (sing)

3. Her …………….. are small and white.                        (tooth)

4. Is your father a ....................?                                       (farm)

5. It’s very.................... in the city.                                   (noise)

6. Our .................... are in the bookstore.                         (child)

7. Dont go straight a head. Its very.......................          (danger)                                  

Question IX. Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa của câu không thay đổi.

1. Does your class have twenty-five students?
    Are there..........................................?
2. How much does a bowl of noodles cost?
    How much is....................................?
3. The work is very hard and he can’t do it.
    This work is too................................
4. Mr. Minh has a daughter, Lan .
    Mr. Minh is .......................................
5. What is the width of this river?
    How............................................... ..?
6. My mother often drives to work.
    My mother often goes ....................
7. What is the price of a cake and an orange?
    How............................................... ..?
8. That book belongs to Nam.
   That is........................................

 

                                                    

     TEST 12

TRẮC NGHIỆM

I/ Choose the best options to complete the statements ( 30 Ms ).

1/ There are four…………………….. in a year : Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter.

a. activities                  b. pastimes             c. seasons                        d. weathers

2. It is often cool in the………………………………………………………………………

a. Spring                       b. Summer              c. Autumn                       d. Winter

3. ………………………water do you want ? à I want 2 bottles.

a. How many                b. How much           c. How often                  d. How long

4. ……………………………do they go to school ? à By motor bike.

a. What                         b. When                  c. How                            d. Where

5. ………………………….. does Nga watch TV ? à Everyday.

a. How many                b. How much               c. When                    d. How often

6. She ……………………………………go to the market .

a. usually does not       b. does usually not    c. does not usually     d. usually not does

7. It …………………………………hot in the  Summer.

a. is often                      b. often is                 c. not often is                    d. not is often

8.  My father ……………………chess with Mr Hung on Sundays.

a. play sometimes        b. sometimes play    c. plays sometimes       d. sometimes plays

9. Mai likes…………………………to music in her free time.

a. listens                        b. listen                    c. listening                       d. to listen

10. They often go camping ……………………. the mountain.

a. in                                b. at                           c. on                              d. to

11. Tuan is good ……………………….. English and Math.

a. at                                b. in                            c. on                              d.  between

12. Look ! the bird ………………………………………………………………………….

a. fly                              b. is flying                  c. are flying                    d. flies

13. What are the boys ………………………… at that time ?

a. do                               b. . does                     c. doing                          d.  to do

14. My house is between the movie theater…………………………….the store.

a. between                      b. next             c.     opposite                   d. and

15. Tuan is sitting…………………………………………. Minh and Lan.

a. between                     b. to the left of                c. behind             d. near

16. The sun rises in the east and …………………………………….in the west.

a. set                               b. setting                         c. sets                  d. to set

17. There are……………………………………….oranges on the table.

a. some                           b. any                                c. a                     d. an

18. There isn’t ……………………………. water in the bottle.

a. a little                          b. any                               c. a                     d. many

20. I’d like a……………………………………………. of soap.

a. can                              b. tube                            c. bottle                d. bar

21. ……………………………………..are they ? à Two dollars.

a. How much                  b. How many                     c. How               d. What

22. She is ………………………………… She likes some fish and some rice.

a. hungry                        b. tired                            c. thirsty                d. full

23. …………………. the matter with Ba ? à He is tired.

a. What                           b. How                           c. What’s                 d. How’s

24. …………………………..the weather like in the Spring ?--> It is warm .

a. How                            b. What                          c. What’s               d. when

25. ………………….. color are her eyes ? à They are black.

a. How                              b. Which                       c. what                    d. when

26. ………………………………… school do you go to ? à Nguyen Hue School.

a. Which                         b. Where                        c. What                  d. When

27. We have English ………………………. Monday and Wednesday.

a. at                                 b. on                                 c. in                      d.  when

28. ……………………………..is the place where people meet and eat.

a. Museum                        b. Factory                      c. Stadium            d. Restaurant

29. My father is driving a car. He is a………… …… …………. .

a. doctor                            b. teacher                   c. driver                d. engineer

30. When your teeth hurt. You have to go to the ………………………………….

a. doctor’s                         b. dentist’s                    c. teacher’s          d. farmer’s

II/ Choose the word that has the underlined part  pronounced  differently.

   1. a.  vacation              b.  match                          c.  badminton          d.  plan

   2. a . temple                 b.  tent                             c.  camera               d.  destination

   3. a. citadel                  b.  idea                             c.  bring                  d.  visit

   4. a.  photo                   b.  go                                c.  home                  d . hot

   5. a.  uncle                    b.  music                          c.  minibus              d . summer

III/ Choose the word or phrase that are not correct  .( 5 Ms).

 

1 .Mr Nam rides his bike to work at the moment .

                     A             B           C         D

2. I don’t have some apples, but I have some oranges.

                     A     B                   C                D

3. How many homework does Nga have everyday.

                 A           B                            C          D

4. I would like a tube of chocolates , please .

          A            B   C              D

5. She goes to visit her grandmother and grandfather next week.

            A           B    C                                       D

IV / Odd one out . ( 5 Ms ).

1. a. aunt                      b.  uncle                               c.  friend              d.  sister

2. a. take                      b.  vacation                          c.  swim               d.  bring

3. a. doctor                   b.  hospital                           c.  teacher           d.  businessman

4. a. town                     b.   city                                 c.  country           d.  house

5. a.  tired                     b.  hungry                            c.  happy             d.  feel

V/ Read the passage then decide the statements True or False.

       Peter is a gymnast. He is tall and thin. He has short black hair. His eyes are brown. He has a round face and thin lips. Peter is having breakfast now. He is eating some noodles. He often has noodles or hamburger and hot dog for his breakfast. After breakfast, he eats some apples and bananas. Then he drinks some coca cola. He feels full and quite tired.

Number

Statements

True

False

1

Peter’s hair is short and black.

 

 

2

He has big and  black eyes.

 

 

3

He is eating hamburger and hot dog now.

 

 

4

He is drinking coca cola at the moment.

 

 

5

He feels very  hungry and comfortable.

 

 

 

TỰ LUẬN

I / Make questions for these sentences ( 10 Ms ).

1……………………………………………………………………………………………?

à They would like a dozen eggs.

2. …………………………………………………………………………………………..?

à Her favorite food is fish and chicken.

3. ………………………………………………………………………………………. ?

à My father works in a factory.

4.………………………………………………………………………………?

à Thuy’s house is in the country.

  5. ………………………………………………………………………………….?

à The police station is between my house and the hotel.

6. …………………………………………………………………………………..?

à When it is hot, Lan goes swimming.

7. ……………………………………………………………………………………?

à It is often cold in the winter in the north of Viet Nam.

8. ……………………………………………………………………………………?

à I am going to visit Dalat this Summer vacation.

9. …………………………………………………………………………………..?

à They are going to stay in Hue for a week.

10. ………………………………………………………………………………….?

à Minh is from Viet Nam.

II/ Rewrite the sentences with the same meanings (5Ms ).

1. How much is a kilo of beef ?

à How much does…………………………………………………………………

2. What is the price of a box of chocolates.

à How ………………. ………………………………………………………….

3. How many bananas do you want ?

à How many ……………….……………………………………………………

4. His father usually drives to work.

à His father ………………………..………………………………………………

5. Does Phong’s School have thirty classrooms?

à Are there………………………………………………………………………

III/ Give the correct form of the verbs (10 Ms ).

    1. Look! The plane ( fly ) towards the airport.

à…………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Why we (not go) to Ha Long Bay this Summer holiday ?

à……………………………………………………………………………..

  1. Tuan often ( play ) basketball in the winter.

à …………………………………………………………………………………

  1. What you (do) now ? à We (listen )to music.

à……………………………………………………………………………………

  1. My brother (use) the computer in his room now. He (use )it everyday.

à……………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Mrs. Smith always (teach) class 6a2, but this morning he (teach )class 6 a3.

à…………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Mai and Tung ( be ) students.

à…………………………………………………………………………………

IV/ Use the cue words to write to complete the sentences. (10 Ms )

  1. Quang brother/ walk/ movie theater/ moment.

  à……………………………………………………………………………

  1. Ba/ usually / play volleyball/ fall/ but sometimes/ sailing.

à………………………………………………………………………………

  1. My mother/ like/ half a kilo of meat/ dozen eggs.

à……………………………………………………………………………

  1. How/ Mr. Lam/ travel/ Ho Chi Minh City.?

à……………………………………………………………………

  1. There / not / tomato/ potato/  the store.

à………………………………………………………………………

V/ Fill in the blanks with the suitable words. ( 10 Ms ).

          Viet Nam, our country, is very beautiful. It has (1)………… seasons: Spring, Summer, Fall and (2)……………. In the spring it is often (3 )……………,sometimes it is rainy. In the summer it is usually hot and sunny. The( 4)…………….is cool in the Fall and in the Winter it is often ( 5 )……………and foggy. I (6 )…………….hot weather

(7 )……………I can do many activities.(8 )…………it is hot  I usually (9 )……….. swimming and (10 )…………….soccer. I sometimes go fishing with my brother.

ANSWER KEY:

        VI/ Read the passage the answer the questions ( 5 Ms ).

              Hello. My name is Julia .When  I grow up , I am going to be a ballet dancer. I love dancing, I  often go dancing three times a week. I am going to travel all over the world and I am going to learn French and Russian because I want to dance in Paris and Moscow. I am not going to marry until I am 36 and then I am going to have two children. I’d like first a girl and then a boy. I am going to work until I am 75 years old.

Answer The Questions:

  1. What is Julia going to be when she grows up ?

à………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. How often does she go dancing ?

à………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Why is she going to learn French and Russian ?

à…………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. How many children is she going to have ?

à……………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. How old is she going to work ?

 

 

TEST 13

 

I. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR. (35 points)

Part 1:Choose the best answer among A, B, C or D. (15 points)

1. My father is..................... man.

         A. a old                       B. an old                     C. not young                     D. not very young

2. I’m tired. I’d like..................... .

         A. sit down                 B. sitting down           C. to sit down                   D. to sitting down

3. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large ..................... .

         A. tin                           B. roll                          C. bar                                D. tube

5. Bangkok is ..................... capital of Thailand.

         A. a                             B. one                          C. X                                  D. the

6. There are ..................... girls in his class.

         A. not                          B. no                           C. none                              D. any

7. ..................... she plays the piano!

         A. How beautiful              B. How beautifully              C. What good              D. What well

8. On ..................... we often go out.

         A. nights of Saturday  B. Saturday nights

         C. Saturday’s nights                                        D. none is correct

9. I don’t want much sugar in coffee. Just ....................., please.

         A. little                        B. a little                     C. few                               D. a few

10. The weather is ..................... today than yesterday.

         A. much better            B. very better              C. too better                      D. so better

11. A. Always they do their homework.                  B. They always do their homework.

      C. They do their homework always.                  D. They always do their homeworks.

12. Minh is from Viet Nam. He’s ..................... .

         A. a Vietnamese          B. Vietnamese          C. a Vietnamese man           D. the Vietnamese man

13. Choose a word that has different stress pattern:

         A. beautiful                 B. vegetable                C. breakfast                       D. apartment

14. What ..................... the weather like in the summer?

         A. is                             B. was                         C. does                              D. would

15. It’s very hot. Why ..................... go swimming?

         A. not we                    B. not                       C. don’t we                    D. Both B & C are correct

16. At an intersection, you ..................... slow down.

         A. can                          B. should                     C. must                              D. have

17. Which word has the final sound /s/:

         A. bananas                  B. carrots                     C. apples                           D. guavas

 

18. Don’t move. You have a ..................... leg.

         A. break                      B. breaking                  C. broke                            D. broken

19. If there aren’t any trash cans, we should put it in a bag and ..................... .

         A. take it to our home B. take it to home

         C. take it home                                                D. take it back our house

20. Our roads are dangerous places. We ..................... .

         A. can be careful                                             B. must be careful            

         C. mustn’t be careless D. Both B & C are correct

21. Make sure ..................... is no traffic.

         A. they                        B. it                             C. there                             D. some

22. Let’s eat here. The ..................... seems very good.

         A. list                          B. paper                       C. programme                   D. menu

23. There’s a good film ..................... ..................... the Rex Cinema tonight.

         A. on / in                     B. on / at                     C. in / on                           D. in / at

24. Don’t ..................... electricity.

         A. save                        B. waste                      C. use                                D. leave

25. The boy suffered ..................... a very bad toothache.

         A. of                            B. from                        C. with                              D. by

26. ..................... book is this, yours or mine?

         A. What                      B. Which                     C. Whose                          D. Who’s

 

Part 2: Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets. (10 points)

1. Anna likes attending the English .............................................. contests.                 (SPEAK)

2. My neighborhood is ..................................... for good and cheap restaurants.          (FAME)

3. I like the city life because there are many kinds of .......................................           (ENTERTAIN)

4. Van’s classroom is on the ......................................... floor.                                      (TWO)

5. These children like ........................................ weather.                                             (SUN)

6. Lan speaks English ....................................... than me.                                             (WELL)

7. The Great Wall of China is the world’s ..................................... structure.              (LONG)

8. What’s Maco’s ........................................? - She’s British.                                       (NATION)

Part 3: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets. (10 points)

1. The sky is very dark. I think it ....... .(rain)

2. David .............. his hands. He .......... the television set. (wash/ just repair)

3. Come to see me at 5 this afternoon. I .............home until 4.30. (not arrive)

4. ............, please! The baby ...........(not talk / sleep)

5. It ............ hard. We can’t do anything until it ..............(rain / stop)

6. Would you mind ........on the light? I hate ..........in a dark room. (turn / sit)

II. READING (25 points)

Part 1: Put these sentences in the right order to complete the passage. Number 1 has been done for you as an example. (10 points)

A. For example, you can get hot dogs

B. a famous fast food restaurant. Do you

C. Today fast food is very

D. the same as one in Mac Duff’s in Tokyo!

E. a fast food restaurant, you can

F. and boxes. Mac Duff’s is the name of

G. You can even take it home.

H. know that a beef burger in Mac Duff’s in London tastes

I. get different kinds of food cheaply and quickly.

J. or beef burgers in paper bags

K. popular throughout the world. In

Part 2: Complete the following letter with the appropriate words. The first letter(s) of each word is (are) given. (15 points)

Dear Mum and Dad,

Hi. I’m on (0) holiday­_ in Vietnam with Ted and Booby. We (1) ar______ in Dalat yesterday. It is a very beautiful city and is (2) kn_________ as the city of Eternal Spring. Dalat is very famous for its (3) water_________, lakes and flower gardens. The first two days the weather was fine, warm and sunny, so we did some (4) sight_________. I took a lot of photographs. On Thursday we went shopping. Everything was cheap, so we bought lots of (5) sou_________ and two nice sweaters for you. In the evening we had (6) d_________ at a lovely little restaurant and then went to a coffeehouse to (7) e_________ Trung Nguyen Coffee. Last night we went to the theater and didn’t get back (8) un_________ 11pm. So, we got up late this morning and (9) dec_________ to have a relaxing day at the hotel. So, that’s(10) wh_________ I’m now.

Love, Peter

III. Writing: Make meaningful sentences using the following cues. (20 points)

1. What time / Ngoc/ get / morning?

.......................................................................................................................................................

3. Long/ walk / ride / bike / school?

.......................................................................................................................................................

4. When / it / cold/ I/ never/ go / swim.

.......................................................................................................................................................

5. What / there / front / your house?

.......................................................................................................................................................

6. If / you / not feel / well / should / see / doctor.

.......................................................................................................................................................

7. What color / your baby / eyes?

.......................................................................................................................................................

8. My uncle/ 4 years / old / mother.

.......................................................................................................................................................

9. I / beef/ so / sister.

.......................................................................................................................................................

10. Huong / learn / languages / bad.

 

TEST 14

 

I. Hãy chọn một từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác từ còn lại.

   1.      A. arm                                     B. grade                       C. face                         D. late

   2.      A. look                                   B. book                       C. cook                        D. food

   3.      A. skip                                     B. kilo                         C. twice                       D. fish

   4.      A. early                                   B. weather                   C. heavy                      D. head

   5.      A. boat                                    B. coat                         C. road                        D. broad         

   6.      A. pound                                 B. out                          C. shoulder                  D. sound

   7.      A. sky                                      B. recycle                    C. dry                          D. bicycle

   8.      A. bush                                    B. pull                         C. brush                       D. push

   9.      A. now                                    B. how                        C. cow                         D. row

   10.    A. good                                   B. gen                          C. gold                        D. gather.

II. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc

   1. My sister (be) a doctor. She (work) in a factory in HN.

   2. How Lam (go) to school?            - She (go) by bike.

   3. My brother (not speak) English well. He (speak) Chinese well.

   4. What would you like (buy)? – I’d like (buy) some coffee.

   5. What you (do) tomorrow? – I (fish) in the lake.

   6.  Where John always (travel)? – He (travel) to HCM city.

    7. Who they (play) soccer with? – They (play) with Long

   8. Look, Hoang (run). Hoang always (run) very fast.

   9.  I (look) for my books now but I (not find) any.

   10. It always (rain) in summer and (be) cold in winter.

III. Hãy chọn đáp án đúng nhất trong các câu A, B, C hoặc D.

 1. (What time /  How / Where /  When)  does she have dinner?       -She has dinner at 7. 

 2. (in   / on / at / to)  Monday, we have math.                      

 3. They live ( on / at / in / to) the city.                                  

 4. My sister (is / am / are / be) a nurse in hospital.   

 5. ( What / How / When / Where) do you go there? – by car.                      

 6. She (have / haves / has / to have)  a small cat.                                         

 7. ( This / These / They / Those) is my schoolbag.                                       

 8. They have ( a / an / one / two) old car.                             

 9. Loan is ( gooder / better / more good / good) than Hoa.                          

10. What about.( to play / playing / plays / playes) volleyball?

IV. Hãy điền một giới từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống để hoàn thành câu.

   1. Put the chair..................the window.

   2. She buys some sugar.....................her mother.

   3. please, tell me the way.................the zoo.

   4. Where are you......................?

   5. Give the ball............Peter.

   6. Take the desks and chairs.................the classroom.

   7. Is there a table...................your kitchen.

   8. Susan is going to her club...............3 o’clock.

   9. My house is...............46 Le Loi street.

   10. The vase is...................the cat and the dictionary.

V. Mỗi câu sau có một lỗi sai, em hãy viết lỗi sai đó và sửa lại cho đúng .

1.      I walks to work in the morning.                  6. There is three books on the table.

2.      Would you like to drinking milk ?              7.Peter doesn’t as tall as Henry.

3.      What does she studies in the evening?  8. How time do they go to school? – At 6:30a.m

4.      How much books do you want to buy?       9. I want to buy a old car to go to school.

5.      We are listenning to pop music now.         10. How many rice do you want to buy?

 

VI. Hãy hoàn thành đoạn văn sau, dùng từ cho tr­­ước để điền vào mỗi ô trống.

 
 

of            from        live         or         in             day    animals

parents       zoo        has                monkeys         many     fall

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

London (1)......... a very fine old zoo, which (2)....... children with their(3)......... and friends visit every day. The (4)......... is in a large park which is not far (5)...... the centre of London. Many old trees grow in the park, and (6).............spring, summer and (7).......... .There are a lot (8).........flowers there too. The zoo is open every (9)..............from 9 a.m to 7 p.m. People who want to (10)..........there can go by bus or by train (11)........by taxi. Many kinds of (12)......... go there such as :  elephants, sea-lions, and polar bears, brown bears and foxes, and big and little (13).............

VII. Hãy điền a, an, the hoặc 0 vào chỗ trống nếu cần thiết

  Mr. John is(1)........... teacher. He teaches in (2)...............small school in (3).........London.

In (4)..............morning he gets up at seven o’clock, has (5).............breakfast and (6)...........

Glass of milk. Then he goes to (7)..............work. He teaches his students (8)...........French.

He has (9)................lunch at school. He goes (10)..............home at one o’clock in (11)........

afternoon. He doesn’t work on (12)..........Saturdays and Sundays, he goes to (13)................

cinema, or reads. He likes (14).............books very much. He has (15).........sister in Oxford and (16)...........brother in (17)..............London.

VIII. Sắp xếp lại trật tự câu sau sao có nghĩa.

  1. often / the children / like / summer, / mustn’t / go to / they / school.
  2. goes / once / he / swimming / a day / often.
  3. watching / the children / the living-room / are / in / now/ TV.
  4. don’t / get up / often / I / early / the morning / in.
  5. does / have / she / history / when /math / and?
  6. should / at night / at / you / home / stay.
  7. more / than / is / intelligent / I / she.
  8. is / travel to / my sister / going to / Da Lat / next summer.
  9. clean / must / I / every day / the house.
  10. do / go to / how often  / the supermarket / you?

IX. Hoàn thành các câu sau sao có nghĩa (10 điểm ).

1. Would / you / like / drink / orange juice?           

2. What / you / watch / the moment?

3. He / always / go / school / 6:40 / the morning.   

4. She / not go / a walk / her friends.

5. They / play / tennis / now.                                  

6. I / want / buy / half / kilo / beef.

7. I / not / do / homework / the moment.              

8. What / you / often / do / the evening?

9. She / sometimes / go / the market / the afternoon.

10.The students / always / English / Monday / Thursday

 

 

 

Test 15

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại

1.         A. books                      B. pencels                    C. rulers                       D. bags

2.         A. read                        B. teacher                    C. eat                           D. ahead

3.         A. tenth                       B. math                       C. brother                    D. theater

4.         A. has                          B. name                       C. family                     D. lamp

5.         A. does                        B. watches                  C. finishes                   D. brushes

6.         A. city                          B. fine                         C. kind                       D. like

7.         A. bottle                      B. job                          C. movie                      D. chocolate

8.         A. son                          B. come                       C. home                       D. mother       

II. Chọn một từ không cùng nhóm với các từ còn lại

1.         A. never                     B. usually                    C. always                    D. after

2.         A. orange                    B. yellow                     C. apple                       D. blue

3.         A. see                          B. thirsty                     C. hungry                    D. hot

4.         A. carrot                      B. rice                          C. bread                      D. noodle

5.         A. face                        B. eye                          C. month                     D. leg

6.         A. you                         B. their                                    C. his                           D. my

7.         A. suger                       B. bottle                      C. box                         D. tube

8.         A. in                            B. but                          C. of                            D. under

III. Em hãy điền một giới từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau

1. My father works for a company (1)…………… Monday (2) …………… Friday.

2. He lives (3)…………………………. a house (4) ……………… the countryside.

3. Lan is standing near the store and she is waiting (5) …………………… the bus.

4. I agree (6)………..… you about that.

5. I like the weather (7) ………… June.

6. Look (8) …………………… the picture (9) ……………….. the wall, please.

7. The desk is (10)…………………. the chair and the bed.

IV. Mỗi dòng sau đây có 1 lỗi sai hày tìm và sử lại cho đúng

1.      She is always on time for the school                    ………………………

2.      She and he goes to work on foot.                         ………………………

3.      Ngoc is tall than her sister.                                              ………………………

4.      Let’s to go shopping!                                                       ………………………

5.      They like watch T.V.                                                       ………………………

6. He comes here with bicycle.                                   ………………………

7. How many childs are there in the room?                ………………………

8. He isn’t understand what you are saying.               ………………………

9. How much eggs do you want?                               ………………………

10. I’d like some tomatos for my breakfast.               ………………………           

V. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc

1. Your father……………….. (go)  to work by bike everyday?  

2. We ……………….. (not watch)  television at the moment.   

3. Let’s ……………….. (help) your friend, Nam. She (do) her homework.

4. What you……………….. (do) this summer vacation?                             

- We……………….. (visit) Ha Long Bay.                             

5. She ……………….. (not have)  breakfast at 6.30 every morning.           

6. It often……………….. (rain) in summer.                                 

VI. Hãy viết câu sau có nghĩa sử dụng từ hoặc nhóm từ gợi ý dưới đây

1. What time / Nga / get / morning?

2. You / can / games / afternoon / but / must / homework / evening.

3.  Lan / walk / ride / bike / school?

4. When / it / hot / we / often / go / swim.

5. What / there / front / your house?

6. Where/ your father/ sit/ now?

7. My class/ start/ seven/ morning.

 8. I/ not often/ swimming/ friends.

 9. Huy/ read/ book/ sister/ sing/ English song now.

VII. Fill in the blank with one suitable word.

     This (1)……… Smith’s room. You can see, his room is not very large. (2)……….

   are two chairs, a table, a bed, a wardrobe (3)……….. a bookshelf in his room. The

   table is near (4) ……….. window. There is an ink- pot, some books and (5) ………

   English- Vietnamese dictionary on the table. The bed is on the right. There are also  

   some books and newspapers on the bed. The wardrope is opposite the bed. Smith has

   many clothes. (6) ………. clothes are all in the wardrobe. The bookshelf is (7)……..

   the wall. There are many (8)………. on it.

VIII. Rewrite the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first.( 2ms)

1.      Apple juice is her favorite drink.  

She …………………………………………………………………………....                                                                                                       

2.      How many oranges do you want? 

     How many oranges would ……………………………………………………?

3.      How much is a bowl of noodles? 

     How much does …………………………........................................................?

4.      There are many students in our class.

     Our class …………………………….................................................................

5.      Why don’t we sing an English song?

     What about ……………………………………………………………………?

6.      My sister cycles to the supermarket.

            My sister goes …………………………………………………………………

7. There are forty students in my class.

=> My class has...................................................................................................

8. The flower garden is in front of the house.

=> The house......................................................................................................

9. We usually ride to school.

=> We usually go................................................................................................

10  The school is big.

=> It is .............................................................................................................

 

TEST 16

I. Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the others:

1. A. call             B. fall          C. small           D. hand

2. A. window      B. down       C. shower        D. town

3. A. cold            B.  post        C. love             D. stove

4. A. cow             B. show       C. know           D. throw

5. A. clear           B. dear         C. hear             D. head

 II. Choose the best answer :

1. Lemonade, apple juice, soda and  .............. are cold drinks.          ( beans, noodles, vegetables, iced tea)

2. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it  ............. a week.       ( once, twice, two times, three times)

3.Ngoc and Yen often do aerobics in  ................free time.                            (your, his, her, their)

4. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer. She  .............. plays soccer.                    ( always, usually, never, often)

5. He wants  ................ an engineer.                                                               ( to be, being, be, is)

6.They would like some milk  ................ dinner.                                           ( in, at, for, of)

7. Minh often goes .............. in the mountains on the weekend.                    ( walking, walks, walk, to walk)

III. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in brackets:

  1.  There are four ................................in my house.                                                       bookshelf.
  2. The photocopy is between the .....................................and the drugstore.                 bake
  3. Is your brother an .........................................?                                                            act
  4. Mai's sister is a  ......................................                                                                   sing
  5. We must be  .................................... when we cross the  road.                                  care
  6. This tree has a lot of green  ..........................................                                             leaf
  7. Is your father a  .............................................?                                                           business
  8. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ....................................................?                              nation
  9. Air ..................................... is a big problem in many cities in the world.                 pollute

10. Yoko is from Japan. She is  ................................                                                       Japan

  IV. Find and correct the mistakes:

1. My mother is going to the market with my.

......................................................................................

2. Mr. Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.

......................................................................................

3. How many homework does Lan have every day?

......................................................................................

4. The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.

5. I'm twenty-one year old and I' m a student.

.....................................................................

6. A lot of my friends play soccer, but not much of them play tennis.

....................................................................

7. Minh and his father are going to plant trees in the garden now.

8. Are they many students in your class?

V.. Read the passage and then write True  (T) or False(F)  for each sentence below:

It’s six o’clock in the evening. Many people are at home. They are having dinner. They are watching  T.V. They are  listening to music. But Mrs. Bich is going to work. She’s a doctor and she works at night  in the hospital. Today she’s late. The hospital is not in her neighborhood so she usually goes by car. Mrs Bich is in her car now. She’s driving fast. She should slow down but she must be at work by six thirty. A policeman stops her. “ You are driving too fast !” , he says. "You are going to have an accident". It’s six thirty. Mrs Bich is not at the hospital. She’s at the police station. Her car must stay there for fourteen days.

1. Many people are not working.

 

6. She is late for work.

 

2. Mrs Bich comes home every evening at six.

 

7. She  drives too fast.

 

3. Mrs Bich is a night doctor.

 

8. A policeman doesn’t keep her car.

 

4. The hospital is near her house.

 

9. She arrives at the hospital at 6.30.

 

5. Mrs Bich goes to work by  motorbike.

 

10. She isn’t going to drive her car for two weeks

 

   VI. Read the passage  and answer the questions:

Anna lives in a village in Africa. Her day starts at 4 o’clock. She gets up, and she walks three kilometers to the river. She collects some water, and carries it back to her house. The water is very heavy. It isn’t clean but there isn’t any water in the village. Anna doesn’t go to school. She can’t read or write. She helps her mother in the house.

     (carry : mang, v¸c, khiªng...)

Questions:

1. Where does Salina live?

..................................................

2. What does Salina do after she gets up?

....................................................

3. Is the water clean?

......................................................

 

4. Where does Salina help her mother?

..........................................................

5. What does she collect?

............................................................

6. Does Salina go to school?

....................................................

 

   VII. Choose the best answer :

1. newspaper / a / day / I / read / every /

a. I read newspaper every day.                                   b. I read a newspaper every day.

c. I read every day a newspaper.                                 d. I every read a day newspaper.

2. Lunch / a / grandfather / after / always / sleep / has.

a. Grandfather always has a sleep after lunch.           b. Grandfather has always a sleep after lunch.

c. Grandfather always has sleep after a lunch.           d. Grandfather always sleep after has a lunch.

3. famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.

a. I like reading books about people famous.             b. I like reading about famous people books.

c. I like reading about people famous books.             d. I like reading books about famous people.

4. listen / I / the / my / car / radio / usually / in / to.

a. I usually listen to the radio in my car.                     b. I listen usually  to the radio in my car.

c. I usually listen to my radio in the car.                     d. I usually listen in my to the radio.

5. face / eyes / big / Lan / round / black / a / and / has.

a.  Lan has a round face and big black eyes.              b.  Lan has round face and a big black eyes.

c.  Lan has a round face and black big eyes.              d.  Lan has round face and a black big eyes.

   

 

TEST 17

 

A- PHONETIC:  T×m tõ cã c¸ch ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi nh÷ng tõ kia ë ch©n g¹ch ch©n:

1/  A. teachers

B. thanks

C. pupils

D. farmers

2/ A. foot

B. door

C. good

D. book

3/ A. teeth

B. thin

C. mother

D. math

4/ A. gymnast

B. vegetable

C. dangerous

D. geography

5/ A. black

B. work

C. knee

D. look

6/ A. young

B. house

C. our

D. trousers

7/ A. cool

B. good

C. room

D. look

8/ A. watches

B. brushes

C. classes

D. lives

9/ A. station

B. question

C. invitation

D. intersection

10/ A. chest

B. school

C. lunch

D. bench

B- VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR

I/ Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng nhÊt cho nh÷ng c©u sau:

1. I must have a drink. I’m so …      (A. dirty           B. hungry         C. thirsty                     D. thirty)

2. Fall means ….. in British English. (A. summer      B. winter         C. autumn                   D. spring)

3. I like ….. weather because I can go swimming.( A. hot    B, cold            C. of                D. foggy)

4. They usually go …. after work.    (A. to fishing    B. cinema        C. home                       D. soccer)

5. Would you like ……. that for you? ( A. me doing            B. me to do     C. me do         D. I do)

6. Don’t be late ….. your music lesson . ( A. on        B. from            C. by                           D. for)

7. What would you like to drink?  - …(A.Thank you    B.Yes, please     C.No, I don’t        D.Tea, please)

8. Let him …. it himself.                    (A. to do          B. do               C. doing                      D. does)

9. How many floors …… in your school? (A. are there    B. there are          C. have there   D. do have)

10. Nam is learning English … the room and his dog is … the  desk.

                                    (A. at, in                      B. in, under                 C. in, on                      D. on, under)

II/ H·y dïng th× thÝch hîp cña ®éng tõ  trong ngoÆc ®Ó hoµn thµnh ®o¹n v¨n sau:

            It is 7.30 a.m and the Browns …(1. be) in the kitchen. Mrs. Brown … (2. sit) at the breakfast table. She … (3. read) the morning paper. Mr. Brown … (4. pour) a cup of coffee. He … (5. drink) two cups of coffee every morning before he … (6. go) to work. There is the cartoon on TV, but the children are not watching it. They … (7. play) with the toys. They usually … (8.watch) cartoons in the morning, but this morning they … ( 9.not  pay) any attention to the TV. Of course. Mr. and Mrs. Brown are not watching TV either. They … (10. not like) watching cartoons.

III/ Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ trong ngoÆc ®Ó hoµn thµnh c¸c c©u sau:

  1. Nam is the ….. of the three boys.                                                       (TALL)
  2. Vietnam has a lot of …… beaches.                                                    (BEAUTY)
  3. Air ….. is a big problem in many cities in the world.                        (POLLUTE)
  4. Our school children sometimes go …..on the weekend.                    (CAMP)
  5. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ….?                                                     (NATION)
  6. Mount Everest is very high. It is the….. mountain in the world.       (HIGH)
  7. Don’t make a fire here. It’s very …..                                                 (DANGER)
  8. Is your father a …..?                                                                           (BUSINESS)

IV/  Mçi c©u sau cã mét lçi sai, em h·y t×m vµ ch÷a l¹i cho ®óng:

  1. How much rice and how many beef do you want?
  2. I usually haven’t lunch on Friday because there isn’t enough time.
  3. John doesn’t like cats, and his sister likes them very much.
  4. Do you know some American people?
  5. A lot of my friends play tennis, but not much of them play badminton.
  6. Minh and his father are going to plant trees in the garden now.
  7. Is she work eight hours a day and six days a week?

8. Tony have two brothers but he doesn’t have a sister.

C- READING

I/ §äc bøc th­ sau råi tr¶ lêi c©u hái theo néi dung cña bøc th­:

            Dear Lala,

            You ask me to describe my village. I live in a very nice village. It is near the sea. My school is opposite some shops. There is a swimming pool near it. There is also a large lake at the seaside of the school. Near the lake, there are some houses. A river runs through the village. There is a railway station at the side of the river. There are two hotels in the village. One of the hotels is in Main Street. Now you know all about my village. Please visit me soon. I am sure you will like everything here.

            With love,

            Paula

Questions:

1. What is Paula’s friend’s name?

2. Where does Paula live?

3. Is her village near the sea?

4. What is there at the side of the school?

5. Does the river run through the village?

6. How many railway stations are there at the side of the river?

7. Is there a hotel in the village?

8. Where is one of the hotels?

 

 II/ §äc kÜ ®o¹n v¨n sau råi viÕt T cho mçi c©u ®óng,  F cho mçi c©u sai:

WORKING IN THE HOUSE

            Today is Sunday. It is fine and warm. The Pikes are staying at home. They are working in the house now. Mr. Pike is cleaning the doors and windows. Peter is helping him. Dick is cleaning the floor. Mrs. Pike and Susan are in the kitchen. Mrs. Pike is washing the dishes. Susan is cleaning the vegetables. They are preparing the lunch. They are going to have a good lunch together.

            The Pikes are not free today. They are busy with the housework, but they are very happy. They are going to finish the housework at half past eleven, then they will have lunch. In the afternoon, they are going to the cinema. In the evening Peter, Dick and Susan are going to do all exercises before going to bed.         

1. There are six people in the Pikes’ family.

2. The Pikes have only one daughter.

3. Mr. Pike and his two sons are working in the garden.

4. Mrs. Pike is washing clothes in the kitchen.

5. The Pikes are not free today.

6. Peter, Dick and Susan are not going to do exercises in the evening.

7. They finish their work at 11.30 a.m.

8. They are going to the pictures in the afternoon.

III/ Chän ®¸p ¸n thÝch hîp nhÊt ®Ó hoµn thµnh bøc th­ sau:

            Dear Jane,

            Would you (1)….. to be my friend? I’m 14 years (2)…. and 1.30 meters (3)….. , with red hair and blue eyes. I (4)…. in Edinburgh with my parents and two sisters.

            I’m a secondary school student. I go to school every day (6)…. 9 a.m ….. 3.30 p.m. First, we have lessons. Then we have lunch-break for one and (7)….. hours. After this we (8)…..  have more lessons (9)….. games.

            I hope you will write to me (10)….. about yourself.

            Your sincerely,

1/ A. like                     B. want                       C. get                          D. need

2/ A. age                      B. of ages                    C. old                          D. time

3/ A. tall                      B. high                        C. big                          D. long

4/ A. stay                     B. am living                 C. live                         D. staying

5/ A. older                   B. elder                       C. the oldest                D. the eldest

6/ A. at/at                    B. at/to                        C. between/at                          D. from/to

7/ A. half a                  B. half an                    C. a half                      D. half

8/ A. mostly                B. either                      C. both                        D. some time

9/ A. with                    B. or                            C. and                         D. after

10/ A. and tell             B. and telling              C. to telling                 D. tell

 WRITING

 Em h·y viÕt l¹i c¸c v©u sau b¾t ®Çu b¨ng tõ cho tr­íc sao cho nghÜa c©u kh«ng ®æi:

1. Does your school have twenty classrooms?           ’  Are ……

2. Phong has a sister, Lan.                                          ’   Lan is ….

3. My mother often drives to work.                            ’   My mother often goes …..

4. What is the width of this road?                               ’   How …..

5. The Mekong River is longer than the Red River.  ’ The Red River ….

6. How many oranges do you want?                          ’ How many oranges would…..

7. There are twelve packets of tea in this box.           ’ This box has ….

8. How much does a bowl of noodles cost?               ’ How much is …….

 

 

TEST 18

Question :I Phonetics  (5 points) Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.(T×m nh÷ng tõ mµ phÇn g¹ch ch©n ®­îc ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i)

1. A. bread                  B. repeat                      C. cheap                      D. teach

2. A. those                   B. that                         C. this                          D. think

3. A. smile                   B. kind                        C. polite                      D. silly

4. A. man                    B. car                           C. hat                          D. bag

5. A. blood                  B. food                        C. pool                        D. room

 

Question : II (15 points) Put each verb in brackets into an appropriate form.

                                       ( Chia nh÷ng ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc cho phï hîp th×)

1. Let’s ( go)______  swimming.                                                                   

2. Mai often ( play) ______ games with her brother.            

3. They often ( go)______ for a walk after school.                           

4. Nam never ( go) ______ to school in the evening.            

5. There ( be) ______no trees in our school garden.                                     

6. Look ! John ( come) ____.                                                                        

7. Peter ( come) ___ from England. He ( come) ___ here 6 months ago to learn Vietnamese. Now he ( be) in the sitting room. Yesterday he ( visit) ___ me.

8. How old ( be) ___ your parents?

9. Who ( stand) ____ over there?

10. What your mother ( do) ____ in the mornings?

11. My close friend ( have) ____ got two brothers.

12. My team ( have) ___ dinner now.

Question :III (15 points) Choose the best answer to complete each sentence.

                                                  ( Chon ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®Ó hoµn thµnh c©u)

1. Would you like ______tea?

            A. any             B. some                       C. a                              D. many

2. There ______ much beer in the bottle.

            A. isn’t                        B. aren’t                      C. is not                       D. A&C

3. ______ does Nam have a toothache? – Because he eats too many cakes.

            A. What                      B. When                      C. Why                        D. Who

4. Hoa is sitting ______ her parents.

            A. next                        B. opposite                  C. in front                   D. between

5. What ______ are her eyes? – They are black.

A. subject                    B. colour                     C. time            D. class

6. Are there any English ______ in your class? – No, there aren’t.

            A. students                  B. student                   C. child                       D. teacher

7. How much ______ is there in the cupboard? – There’s a lot.

            A. eggs                        B. oranges                   C. milk                        D. apples

8. I’m going ______ some oranges.

            A. buying                    B. buy             C. buys                        D. to buy

9. My sister is ______me.

            A. tall than                  B. taller than               C. than tall                   D. than taller

10. The Mekong River is______ than The Red River.

            A. longer                     B. taller                       C. shorter                    D. higher

11. She is from Japan. She speaks ______.

            A. Vietnamese B. English                   C. Chinese                   D. Japanese

12. Everest is ______mountain in the world.

            A. the height               B. the higher                C. highest                    D. the highest

13. She is studying hard. She is going to be______ student in my class.

            A. the best                   B. best             C. the better                D. better

14. What______ the weather like today?

            A. do                           B. is                             C. does                        D. A&B

15. What do you often do______ the summer?

            A. at                            B. in                            C. on                           D. for

Question : IV (10 points) Give the correct form of the word in the bracket.

                                           ( Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ trong ngoÆc)

0. He said Good morning in the most ……………. way.              (FRIEND)

1. Her father is careless. He drives car ____ .                                    ( CAREFUL)

2. I have ___ friends than my brother has.                                         (FEW)

3. Live ____ ! My mother said to me.                                                            ( HAPPY)

4. Adjective of danger is ___ .                                                            (DANGER)

5. What is his ____ ?                                                                          ( NATION)

6. Every nation needs ____ .                                                              ( FREE)

7. Is this information ___ for you?                                                     ( USE)

8. Drinking wine much is ___ to our health.                                      ( HARM)

9. All ____ people came on time.                                                       ( INVITE)

10. We always swim in the ____ pool in Summer.                            ( SWIM)

Question : V (10 points) Put question for the underlined part in the following answers ( §Æt c©u hái cho phÇn g¹ch ch©n). 

            Example:        I live in a small village.

            Question:        Where do you live?

1. The students are sitting in the classroom.

2. Linda has to stay in bed because she is sick.

3. My classmates like camping in the park.

4. My father went to work two hours ago

5. There are 20 hotels in this city.

6. I last saw him when I was a student.

7. I sometimes go to school on foot.

8. Our father always gets up early.

9. Our school is very beautiful and big.

10. Mr. Smith comes from the United States.

Question : VI (5 points) Find out one mistake in each sentence and correct it.

                                 ( Mçi c©u cã mét lçi t×m ra vµ söa l¹i ®Ó c©u trë nªn ®óng)

        Example: The man is driving car very fastly.                            fastly  à fast

1. There is a few water in the glass.

2. There is a few books on the shelf.

3. They often go swim in the summer.

4. Mai and Nam don’t go to school in Sundays.

5. Mr. Linh usually have dinner at seven o’clock in the evening.

Question : VII (10 points)    

a/ Read the passage and choose the best option to complete each blank.

    ( Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®Ó hoµn thµnh ®o¹n v¨n)

Every spring children go (1) ______, so Mr. John and his wife (2) ______  to Paris on holiday. They stay in a hotel near The River Seine. They (3) ______  breakfast in the hotel, but they have lunch in a restaurant next to the hotel. French food (4) ______  delicious. They walk a lot, but sometimes they go (5) ______  taxi. After four days they want to go home and go back to work.

1. A. ski                             B. to ski                       C. skiing                      D. A&B

2. A. goes                          B. go                           C. going                      D. to go

3. A. have                          B. has                          C. having                     D. to have

4. A. is                               B. ’s                             C. are                           D. A&B

5. A. on                             B. by                           C. in                            D. to

b/ Read the passage and then answer the following questions

    ( §äc ®o¹n v¨n sau ®ã tr¶ lêi c©u hái ë d­íi)

Mr. Brown is a farmer. He has got some paddy fields and he grows a lot of wheat. He also has got a small garden. He grows a few vegetables there. He has some animals. He has got two cows and seven pigs. He also has got a lot of chickens, two dogs and one cat. The cows produce a lot of milk. The dog keeps the house safe. The cat kills a lot of mice on the farm. The chickens produce a lot of eggs. The pigs produce a little pork and bacon. His animals are useful.

1. What does Mr. Brown do?

2. How many paddy fields has he got?

3. How many cows has he got?

4. How many dogs has he got?

5. Are his animals useful?

 

 

TEST 19

 

Question I: Fill in the blank with one suitable word: (2m)

family        comes        watches        cleaning

talking           are           go             market

My sister and I (1) ______________ to school in the morning and come home in the afternoon. Our mother goes to the (2) ______________ at half past seven. She gets food for the

(3) _____________ Our father (4) ____________ home at six everyday. He (5) _____________ television in the evening. Today is Sunday. We are at home, and we are (6) ______________ our house. We are working and (7) ______________ . We (8) ______________ having a good time at home.

Question II. Put the verbs into correct tense or form: (2 ms)

1.        He still (do) ______________  our work now. But he will (go) ______________  with you when he (finish) ______________  it.

2.        On my way home I often (meet) _____________  many children who (go)  _____________ to school.

3.        The sun (rise) ______________  in the east and (set) ______________  in the west.

4.        Mary (not work) ______________ today because it's Sunday.

5.        4. My father and I (visit) ______________ Ha Long Bay this summer vacation.

Question III. Circle the best answer A, B or C to complete each of the following sentences

(2 pts)

  1. Mexico City is _______ city in the world.

      A. biger                       B. big                          C. bigger                     D. the biggest

  1. My brother and I _______ our grandmother next weekend.

      A. visit                        B. am going to visit  C. am visiting    D. are going to visit

  1. We go to the movies____ Sunday evening.

      A. to                            B. at                             C. on                           D. for

  1. There is _______ milk in the glass.

      A. a                             B. any              C. some                       D. the

  1. She has_______ .

      A. a long black hair    B. a black long hair     C. A hair long black D. long black hair

  1. Many Asian animals are ______ danger.

      A. in                            B. on                           C. at                             D. of

  1. I feel lonely because I have______  friends there.

      A. a little                     B. a few                      C. little                        D.  few

  1. ______  boy in the corner is my friend.

            A. The                         B. An                          C. A                            D. Ø

Question IV.  Insert the correct form of the words in brackets: (2 ms)

Ex: My mother is a______________ of English.                                           (TEACH)

       My mother is a teacher of English.

1.        Her brothers are ______________                                                   (FARM)

2.        She sent her best wishes for my future______________ .               (HAPPY)

3.        He was punished for his______________ .                                     (LAZY)

4.        We don’t like going in his car as he is a______________ driver.               (CARE)

5.        AIDS is a______________ disease.                                                 (DANGER)

6.        She looks______________ in her new coat.                                    (ATTRACT)

7.        He turns out to be the______________ student in his class.            (GOOD)

8.        Nam is always ______________                                                      (BUSINESS)

Question V. Rewrite the sentences in a way that is has similar meaning to the original sentences:

1.    Mai is not as tall as Lan.

           → Lan is. .......................................................................................................

2.    The black car is cheaper than the red car.

           →The red car ............................................................................................................

3.    This film is more interesting than that one.

           →That film is ............................................................................................................

4.    Our school has 1600 students.

            There are ………………………..........................................................................

Question VI. Read the passage and decide if the statements are True (T) or False (F). (1pts)

Miss Lien lives in a small house in Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually has breakfast at seven in the morning and she has lunch at twelve o'clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches her students in the morning. She teaches them dialogues on Wednesdays and Fridays. On Mondays, she teaches them grammar. In the evening, she usually stays at home and listens to music. She sometimes goes to the movie theatre. She always goes to bed at ten o'clock.

0.      __F____ Miss Lien lives in a big house and teaches English at a school in Hanoi.

1.      ______   She usually has breakfast at 7.30 in the morning and has lunch at home at 12 o'clock.

2.      ______   She teaches her students dialogues on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays.

3.      ______   She usually stays at home in the evening and goes to bed at 9.

4.      ______   Sometimes she goes to the movie theatre.

 

 

TEST 20

 

I. NGỮ ÂM

1. Tìm một từ có  phần gạch chân  phát âm khác với phần gạch chân của các từ còn lại

1.  A. peace

2.  A. chocolate

3.  A. practises

4.  A. year

5.  A. usually

6.  A.flower

7.  A. gymnast

8.  A. cat

9. A. brother

10. A. when

B. eat

B.lemonade

B. rises

B. early

B. summer

B. town

B. geography

B. city

B. front

B. which

C. meat

C. classmate

C.fixes

C. near

C. lunch

C. plow

C. garden

C. center

C.orange

C. who

D. near

D. name

D. misses

D. hear

D. but

D. know

D. change

D. cell

D. dozen

D. what

1........................

2........................

3........................

4........................

5........................

6.........................

7.........................

8........................

9.........................

10.......................

II. NGỮ PHÁP - TỪ VỰNG

1. Chọn đáp án thích hợp nhất (A, B, C hoặc D) để hoàn thành mỗi câu sau

 11. How ......................... kilos of  beef does she want?

     A.  many                          B. much                        C. any                           D. about

12. I don’t like vegetables but my sister .........................

     A. do                               B. likes                          C. does                          D. would like

13. “Would you like some noodles, Lan?” - “No, .........................I’m full. Thanks.”

     A. I wouldn’t                  B. I don’t                      C. I’m not                     D. I don’t like

14. “Is that your father?” - “Yes, .........................”

     A. it’s                              B. he is                          C. that is                        D. it is

15. “How ......................... oranges would you like” - “A dozen, please. And ......................... tea.”

     A. much, some                B. many, any                 C. much, any                 D. many, some

16. “Does Mary like .........................?” - “Yes. She jogs every morning.”

     A. jog                              B. to jog                        C. jogging                     D.jogs

17. “I’d like some meat, please.” - “How much .........................?”

     A. do you like                  B. do you want             C. ‘d you like                D. you need

18. Which movie theater.........................?

     A. do you want to go to  B. do you want to go    C. you want to go         D. do you want to go it

19. He has a garage. That garage is .........................

     A. him                             B. of him                       C. his                             D. of his

20. This is a / an ......................... movie.

     A. American terrific old                                        B. terrific old American   

     C. terrific American old                                        D. old American terrific

       2. Hãy cho dạng đúng của các động từ trong ngoặc

a. We ( 21 - be) ......................... tired. We’d like (22 - take) ......................... a rest.

b.Alice (23 - not take) ......................... the bus to school every day. She (24 - walk) .........................

c. There (25 - be) ......................... a teacher and forty three students in the classroom.

d. “What you still (26 - do) ......................... here at this moment? It (27 - be) 11p.m. - “Nothing”

e. Her life is boring. She (28-watch) ......................... television every night.

f. “ What you (29 - do) ......................... this summer vacation? - “We (30 - visit) ......................... our grand parents in Hue.

3. Hãy cho dạng đúng của các từ trong ngoặc

         a.You must be  (31) ......................... when you cross the road.                                   (care)

         b. My aunt has two  (32)  ......................... , a boy and a girl.                                       (child)

         c. September is the (33) ......................... month of the year.                                        (nine)

         d. My father goes (34) .........................every morning.                                                (jog)

         e.There is a (35) ......................... garden to the right of my house                               (beauty)

         f. She has small white (36) ......................... .                                                                (tooth)                                          

         g. There are  (37)  ......................... twenty eight days in February.                              (usual)                                          

         h. This is the  (38) ......................... pagoda in our country                                            (old)        

         i. In the (39) ........................., there is a museum, a factory and  a stadium.                (neighbor)

         j. Minh is (40) ......................... at English than I am.                                                    (good)                                    

4. Điền một mạo từ thích hợp (a/ an/ the hoặc q) vào mỗi chỗ trống

a. She’s  (41) ......................... good musician. She plays (42) ......................... piano beautifully.              

       b. I don’t use (43) ......................... sugar when I cook.

c. It’s (44) ......................... fast car. It’s top speed is 150 miles (45) ......................... hour.

d. (46) ......................... population of (47) .........................world  is increasing.

e. I live in (48) ......................... countryside. Sometimes I go to (49) ......................... town.

f. She often stays at home at night and listens to (50) ......................... radio.

5. Điền một giới từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong các câu sau

a. It is hot (51) .........................  the summer.

b. She has breakfast (52) ......................... bread and milk.(53) ......................... lunch, she has rice, meat, vegetables and orange juice.

c. I have lessons (54) ......................... 7 o’clock (55) ......................... a quarter past eleven.

d. They live (56) ......................... an apartment (57) ......................... the city.

e. The beef is (58) ......................... the table, (59) ......................... the chicken and the vegetables.

f. “How do you go to school?” - “(60) ......................... my father’s car.”

III. ĐỌC HIỂU

 Điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong bức thư  sau

Vietnam, our country, is very beautiful. It has four (61) _____ : spring, summer, fall and (62) _____. In the spring it is often warm, sometimes it’s rainy. In the summer it’s hot and sunny. The (63) _____ is cool in the fall and in the winter it is (64) _____and windy. I (65) _____ hot weather (66) _____ I can do many activities. (67) _____ it’s hot, I usually (68) _____ swimming and (69) _____soccer. Sometimes I go fishing (70) _____ my brother.                                                                                                                                                                                                           

      IV. VIẾT

  1. Dùng từ và cụm từ đã cho để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh  

71. You / can / games / afternoon / but / must / homework / evening

      .......................................................................................................................................................

72. Huy / read / book / sister / sing / English song / now.

      .......................................................................................................................................................

73. Miss Thuy / wash / hair / because / she / go / party / tonight.

      .......................................................................................................................................................

74. I / like / read / books / famous people.      ........................................................................................................................................................

75. Hoa / get up / early / morning / and / aerobics / keep fit.       ........................................................................................................................................................

76. His mother / tall / thin/ woman  / black / hair / blue eyes.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

77. you / usually / brush / teeth / before / go / bed?

      ........................................................................................................................................................

78. Peter / listen  / music / free time.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

79. I /can drive / but / have / car .

      ........................................................................................................................................................

80. Mrs. Baker / going / buy / some / apples / children?

      ........................................................................................................................................................

       2. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa không đổi

81. How  about going to Huong Pagoda by minibus?

      Why .................................................................................................................................................

82. My house is not far from the post office.

      My house is .....................................................................................................................................

83. I often cycle to school.

     I often go...........................................................................................................................................

84. What would Lan like for her birthday?

      What does ......................................................................................................................................

85. Jane is shorter than Mary.

     Mary is .............................................................................................................................................

86. Nam gets up at 5.30.

     Nam gets ..........................................................................................................................................

87. What is the price of this bike?

      How much .....................................................................................................................................?

88. The drugstore is to the right of the  bakery.

      The bakery ......................................................................................................................................

89. What is she?

     What ..............................................................................................................................................?

90. Her hair is long. It is black and straight.

      She has ............................................................................................................................................

3. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân

91. You can go to the supermarket to buy beef.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

92. Lan goes to school with her friends.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

93. They go to the zoo every weekend.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

94. I’d like some beef and a dozen eggs.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

95. She is going to stay there for two days.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

96. My daughters do aerobics every morning.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

97. Yoko is Japanese.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

98. Mary can’t answer the phone because she’s having a bath now.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

99. Her favorite food is fried rice.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

100. She is at work from 8 o’clock to 11 o’clock.

      ........................................................................................................................................................

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TEST 26  (135 câu)

I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.

1.         A hats                          B pens                         C cats                          D books          

2.         A bus                           B museum                   C drug                        D lunch                      

3.         A heavy                       B leave                       C head                         D ready                      

4.         A fly                           B hungry                     C usually                     D early           

5.         A brother                     B these                        C thank                       D that             

6.         A door                         B book                        C look                         D cook           

7.         A read                         B teacher                     C near                          D eat               

8.         A face                          B small                        C grade                        D late             

9.         A  twice                       B swim                        C skip                          D picnic                      

10.       A arm                          B charm                       C farm                         D warm                      

II. Chọn phương án đúng nhất điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau.

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s________ home.

A. go                           B. to go                       C. going                      D. goes

2. Tuan and I________ badminton in the yard.

A. playing                   B. is playing                C. are playing              D. am playing

3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ________ go straight ahead.

A. can                          B. don’t can                C. must                        D. must not

4. They are going to New York ________  plane.

A. in                            B. by                           C. with            D. on

5. Viet is ________ something on his book.

A. writing                    B. writting                   C. wrote                      D. writes

6. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any                          D. the

7. My sister and I ________  television in the living room now.

A. am watching           B. are watching           C. is watching             D. watching

8. ________ do you go to school? .  I walk.

A. How                       B. By what                  C. How many              D. How by

9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” .  “No, ________”

A. she not plays           B. she don’t                C. she isn’t                  D. she doesn’t

10. How many floors ________ in your school?

A. there are                 B. there has                 C. are there                  D. have there

11. She is not doing __________ in the garden, just walking about.

A. anything                 B. nothing                   C. something               D. one thing

12. It is twelve o’clock, Mai Anh. Let’s ________ home

A. goes                        B. to go                       C. going                      D. go

13. These are my note books, and those are ________

A. you                         B. your                        C. yours                       D. your’s

14. Nam usually goes ________ after school.

A. to fishing                B. home                       C. the cinema             D. house

15. Are there ________ stores on your street?

A. a                             B. an                            C. any                          D. the

16. ________do you get there? – We walk, of course.

A. Why                       B. What                       C. How by                   D. How

17. What time ________ on television?

A. is the news             B. are the news           C. is news                    D. are news

18. I am very tired. .  ________.

A. Me too                    B. for me the same      C. Also me                  D. I also

19. Don’t be late ________ your school.

A. on                           B. at                             C. to                            D. for

20. I don’t want much sugar in my coffee. Just _______ please.

A. little                        B. a little                     C. few             D. a few

21. ________ is that? ~ It’s a pencil.

A. How many B. How                        C. Who                        D. What

22. Is this an ________?

A.umbrellas                 B. book                       C. eraser                      D. pen

23. I am  ________, so I don’t want to eat any more.

            A. hungry                    B. thirsty                     C. full                          D. small

24. ________do you work?   .  I work at a school.

            A. What                      B. Where                     C. When                      D. How

25. I’m going to the ________now. I want to buy some bread.

            A. post office              B. drugstore                C. bakery                     D. toystore

26. Is this her ________?

            A. erasers                    B. books                      C. an eraser                 D. eraser

27. The opposite of “weak” is ________.

            A. thin                         B. small                       C. strong                     D. heavy

28.  She doesn’t have ________friends at school.

            A. a                             B. some                       C. many                       D. much

29.  ________long or short?

            A. Does Mai have hair                                    B. Is Mai’s hair

            C. Does Mai’s hair have                                 D. Is Mai of hair

30. I need  a large ________of toothpaste.

            A. bar                          B. can                          C. tube            D. box

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc.

h.      I (1 – don’t like)  …………… coffee very much.

i.        Mrs. Nga (2 - is) ……………  a doctor. She (3 - works) …………… in a hospital.

j.        Lan (4 – is going to visit)……………  Hue this summer vacation.

k.      What are you (5 - doing) ……………  now? ~ I (6 – am doing) …………… my home work

l.        There (7 - is) …………… some milk in the fridge.

m.    Look! The plane is flying  towards the airport. It (8 – is landing/is going to land)……………

n.      My father (9 -is watching) …… TV in the living room. He often (10 - watches) …… TV in the evening.

IV. Sử dụng từ loại đúng của các từ cho sẵn để hoàn thành câu.

11.  It’s very ……noisy……… in the city.                                                     (noise)

12.  There is a ……bakery……… next to my house.                                    (bake)

13.  She is a ……teacher……… of English.                                                 (teach)

14.  I brush my ……teeth……… twice a day.                                               (tooth)

15.  Long goes ……sailing……… at the weekend.                                       (sail)

16.  Their house is on the ……fifth……… floor of the building.                 (five)

17.  Thai Binh is ……smaller……… than Hanoi.                                         (small)

18.  Do you ……usually……… play video games?.                                     (usual)

19.  This is the ……oldest……… house in my village.                                 (old)

20.  Peter ………drives……… a very big truck.                                            (driver)

V. Điền vào chỗ trống bằng 1 giới từ thích hợp.

i.        There are trees (1)……behind/next to……… my house.

j.        Lee is Chinese. He is (2)……from……… China.

k.      She lives (3)……in……… Hanoi (4)……with……… her aunt and uncle.

l.        The cat is not on the table. It’s (5)……under……… the table.

m.    I often listen (6)………to…… music (7)……in……… my free time.

n.      Can I help you? ~ I’d like a tube (8)……of……… tooth paste.

o.      We go to school (9)……in……… the morning.

p.      Jane often goes to work (10)……by……… bus.

 

 

 

VI. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau.

11.  Thuy goes to school by bus.

How does Thuy go to school?

12.  I am in grade 6.

Which grade are you in?

13.  There are four people in his family.

How many people are there in his family?

14.  Her eyes are brown.

What color are her eyes?

15.  It is cool and nice in the fall in my country.

What is the weather like in the fall in your country?

16.  They are going to school.

Where are they going?

17.  Mrs. Trang feels very tired.

How does Mrs.Trang feel?

18.  Those are peas and beans.

What are those?

19.  An ice – cream is 4,000 dong.

How much is an ice-cream?

20.  Marie speaks French.

What language does Marie speak?

VII. Haõy saép xeáp nhöõng caâu sau thaønh moät ñoaïn vaên thích hôïp , caâu ñaàu tieân vaø cuoái cuøng ñaõ hoaøn thaønh nhö ví duï.

1. E     ; 2C  3B    4A     5D    6G     7F

A. I am even less lucky . I  never  catch anything – not even an old boot

B. Instead of catching  fish, they catch old boots and rubbish .

C. But this does not worry me . Some fishermen  are unlucky.

D. I always  go home  with an empty  bag. “ You must give up  fishing ! “ my friends say.

E. Fishing is my favourite  sport . I often fish for hours  without  catching anything.

F. I don’t really like fishing. I only want to sit  in a boat  and do nothing at all.

G. It’s a waste of time. But they don’t know one important thing

 

VIII.  Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi.

11.  My school has over 25 classrooms.

There are over 25 classrooms in my school                                                                       

12.  Miss White’s face is oval. It is small.

Miss White has a small oval face.

13.  Jane goes to school on foot.

Jane walks to school

14.  What food do you like?.

What is your favorite food?                                                  

15.  He gets up at five fifteen.

He gets up at a quarter past five

16.  I brush my teeth after breakfast, lunch and dinner.

I brush my teeth 3 times a day                                                                      

17.  What does he do?

  What is his job? / what is he?                                 

18.  Why don’t we go to Dam Sen Park?

What about going to Dam Sen Park?

19.  The bookstore is to the right of the restaurant.

The restaurant is to the left of the bookstore.

20.  Carol doesn’t live far from her office.

Carol lives near her office.

 

IX. Tìm 10 lỗi sai trong đoạn văn sau và sửa lại cho đúng.

Miss Lien lives in a small house in Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually has breakfast at seven in the morning and she has lunch at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches her students in the morning. She teaches them dialogue on Wednesday and Friday. On Mondays, she teaches them grammar. In the evening, she usually stays at home and reads books. She sometimes goes to the movies theater. She always goes to bed at ten o’clock.

X. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống.

SINGAPORE

Singapore is an island city of about three million people. It's a beautiful (1) ......city..... with lots of parks and open spaces. It's also a very (2) ........clean......... city.

Most of the people (3) .......live......... in high rise flats in different parts of the island. The business district is very modern with (4) .....lots...... of high new office buildings. Singapore also has some nice older sections. In China town, there (5) .......are.......... rows of old shop houses. The Government buildings in Singapore are very  beautiful  (6).......and..........  date from the colonial days.

Singapore is famous (7)....for...... its shops and restaurants. There are many good shopping centers. Most of the (8) .....goods ..... are duty free. Singapore's restaurants (9) ....serve.... Chinese, Indian, Malay and European food, and the (10) .....prices....... are quite reasonable.= phải chăng, hợp lý

Note 82

Be famous for = be well-known for: nổi tiếng về

 

XI. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa.

1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.

Minh lives in a house near a lake

2. a / plays   / badminton / Paul / week / twice.

Paul plays badminton twice a week

2.     like / the / weather / fall/ what / is / the / in?

What is the weather like in the fall?

3.     building / tallest / in / this / my city / the / is .     

This is the tallest building in my city      

4.     good / the/ there /let’s /  and/ time / beach / go / have / to / a.

Let’s go to the beach and have a good time there.

5.     small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has.

His sister has small white teeth and thin lips.

6.     hot / go / when / I/ often/ swimming / it / is.

When it is hot I often go swimming.

7.     camping / often / do / how / you / go?

How often do you go camping?

9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer.

We are going to stay with our grandparents next summer vacation

10. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world.

The Nile River is the longest in the world.

 

 

 

XII. Haõy cho daïng duùng cuûa caùc tính töø ñaõ cho trong ngoaëc ñeå hoaøn thaønh ñoaïn vaên sau  , theo ví du.

    Example :  1 : best

            Dave and I  are having the (1-best) ________ holiday of our lives  ! We are in  Barbados, one of the (2-  loveliest ) ________  islands in the Caribean . Although it is much (3- smaller)______  than Jamaica, there seems to be ( 4- more)________ to do than in Jamaica. Moreover, the people here seem to be (5-friendlier) ________  than those on the other islands. We are staying in the  ( 6- most mordern)_________ hotel I have ever seen . It’s large and cool , and many people think it is the (7 – best) _________ hotel on the island . It’s far (8- more comfortable) _________ than any of the other hotels, and it’s even (9-bigger)____ than the world famous Belton Hotel. The (10- nearest) ________  beach  is (11- less)_________ than a hundred metres away, and so we can go swimming a lot. It’s really good, and I do wish you were here.

           

 

Test 27

I. Tìm một từ không cùng nhóm với các từ còn lại (1đ)

1. A.month                 B.seventh                    C.ninth                        D.eighth

2.A.geography             B. housework             C.math                        D.English

3.A.read                      B. watch                      C.book                        D.write

4.A.listening               B.working                   C. playing                   D.morning

II. Viết từ trái nghĩa của những từ sau đây  (1đ)

5.black   - white

6.long  - short

7.heavy  -  light

8.hungry  - full

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ( 2 đ)

9.Trang usually (listens) ………to the teacher in the class .

10. Nam (is looking ) ……………… out of the window at the moment.

11.Where’s your father ? He (is)…………..in the bathroom.

12…Do………your children (go)…………..to school by bus everyday?

13.There ( are) ………many flowers in our garden.

14.Every day Mr.Hung (doesn’t drive) …………….to work.

15. What is Mai (doing) ………….now?

16.We are tired and we’d like (to sit) …….down.

 

IV. Mỗi câu sau có một lỗi sai , hãy sửa lại cho đúng(1,5 đ)

17.How much rice and how many beef do you want? → x / many → much

18.She’d like a dozen eggs and any vegetables.       → some

19.Can you to go to the supermarket for me ,Hoa ? → go

20.We need eight hundred gram of beef.            → grams

21.What would you like buying at the canteen ? → to buy

22.There is a apple on the table.                             an

V. Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại sau đây ( 3 đ)

Lien : Hello, Mai (23)………………………………………..everyday ?

Mai : I get up at a quarter to six

Lien : (24) …………………………………………………..morning ?

Mai : I play badminton.

Lien : (25)…………………………………………………..half past six ?

Mai : No, I don’t. I go to school at six thirty.

Lien : (26)…………………………………………………..today ?

Mai : No, we don’t. We have history on Tuesday and Saturday.

Lien : So (27)………………………………………………………………?

Mai : We have English, geography and math.

Lien : (28)……………………………………………………go jogging ?

Mai : I always go jogging .

VI. Đọc đoạn văn sau rồi trả lời các câu hỏi bên dưới ( 1,5đ)

Hello, I’m Trung.This is my school. It is small and old but it is beautiful .Behind the school , there is a large yard. After school in the afternoon we often play soccer there.The yard is clean and there are many trees and flowers. My friends and I sit under these trees every morning to review our lessons. My school has two floors and fifteen classrooms.My classroom is on the first floor. There are forty - three teachers in my school. They are good teachers. I love them and I love my school very much.

Questions :

29. Is Trung’s school big ?

30. What is there behind Trung’s school ?

31. What do Trung and his friends often play after school ?

32. Where do Trung and his friends sit every morning to review their lessons

33. Does his school have two floors ?

34. How many teachers are there in his school ?

VII. Điền một từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống ( 3 đ)

Today is Sunday. (35)……. is fine and warm.Mr Kien’s family are (36)……………at home.They are working in the house now.Mr Kien is cleaning the doors and windows.Nam is helping (37)……………....Mrs Oanh and Hoa (38) …………….in the kitchen.Mrs Oanh is (39) ……….the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables.They are cooking the lunch. They are going to (40) ……….a good lunch together.

VIII. Sắp xếp những từ sau thành câu có nghĩa ( 2đ)

41. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has .

His sister has small white teeth and thin lips.

42. Brown’s / round / Mrs / or / is / oval / face ?

Is Mrs. Brown’s face oval or round?

43. coffee / aren’t / some / but / there / is / any / apples / there / iced.

There aren’t any apples but there is some iced coffee.

44. like / I / wouldn’t / because / bread / not / I’m / hungry.

I wouldn’t like bread because I am not hungry.

45. your / drink / brother’s / what / favorite / is ?

What is your brother’s favorite drink?

46. a / is / Lan’s house / garden / there / big / behind.

There is a big garden behind Lan’s house

47. Ho Chi Minh City / Mrs Oanh / do / family / to / how / and / travel / her ?

How do Mrs. Oanh and her family travel to HCM city?

48. walking / their / mountain / go / the / they / house / often / in / near.

They often go walking in the mountain near their house.

IX. Dùng từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh ( 2,5 đ)

49. Mrs Hue / children / eating / breakfast / foodstall.

Mrs. Hue’s children are eating breakfast at the foodstall.

50. your / brother / play / volleyball / yard / now ?

Is your brother playing volleyball in the yard now?

51. Mr / Mrs Thu / travel / work / car / everyday.

Mr and Mrs. Thu travel to work by car everyday

52. Nam / friends / go / school / now .

Nam and his friends are going to school now

53. Every / afternoon / school / Ba / housework / and / listen / music.

Every aftenoon, after school, Ba often does his housework and listens to music.

X. Dùng từ gợi ý ở đầu câu thứ hai viết lại câu thứ nhất sao cho nghĩa không thay đổi ( 2,5 đ) .

54. The garden is behind Nam’s classroom.

Nam’s classroom is in front of the garden

55.Tom drives to work every morning .

Tom travels to work by car every morning

56.There are four people in her family

Her family has 4 people

57. He goes to work at seven fifteen.

He goes to work at a quarter past seven.

58.This box has twelve packets of tea.

There are 12 packets of tea in this box.

 

TEST 28

I. Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất. Ghi A, B, C hoặc D vào khung ANSWERS: 

1. My friend goes to school by motorbike, but I ( doesn’t / don’t  / goes  /  does)

2. Is he  bad ( for / at / on / in ) Physics? 

3. Whose book are you reading?- It’s ( English book  / interesting / Mary’s / about Mary)

4. Who is ( tall / taller / tallest / the tallest) person in your family?

5. Where is Anne from?  - She’s from ( the France / France / French / the country of France )

6. Please speak a little more ( slow / slowly / slower / slowlier)

7. On Sunday mornings, I often go (swimming / swim / to swim /  to swimming)

8. Which is ( the biggest  / bigger / bigger than / the big), London or Tokyo?

9. What’s your (national  / country / nation / nationality) ?           - I’m Vietnamese.

10. He (doesn’t go often / often doesn’t go / doesn’t often go / often not goes) jogging.

11. I have ( little / few /  less / fewer)  books than she does.

12. My mother always wants me (to play / playing / play / to playing) the piano well.        

13. Lan’s father’s mother is her ( grandparents / grandfather / grandmother / aunt)

14. Who ( teach / does teach / do teach / teaches) you English?                

15. Nam ( is writting / is writing / writes / will write)  his exercise at the moment

16. How far it it ___ here ____ your house? – ( A.from/ with   B. from/ to    C. to/ from   D. by/ to)

17. There isn’t ( some / many / no / any) milk in the box.

18. Mrs. White has a daughter. ( Her  / She’s / He’s / His) name is Hoa.        

19. (How many / How long / How much / How often) homework do you get ?        

20. I can’t speak French but my brother (can / can’t / does / doesn’t)

21. Sports are very good for our (healthy / unhealthy / health / healthily)

22. Do you enjoy (going / go / goes / to go)  to the movie theater?

23. HCM City is one of (most beautiful / the beautifulest /beautiful /the most beautiful) cities in VN         

24. It takes me half (a / an / the / X )  hour to do this test.

25. If you don’t get up early, you’ll be late (for / on / at / to) school.

26. Chọn từ được nhấn ở vần thứ nhất:  ( A. television   B. cartoon  C. engineer   D. eraser )

27. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân  phát âm khác với những từ còn lại: (what / who / where / when)

28. What (does / has / is / can)  your English teacher like?     - She’s tall and thin.

29. What is Lan doing?   - She’s (working / making / doing / does)  her homework.

30. Ba is a _ driver. He drives very _. (carefully/careful /care/carefully /careful /careful careful/ carefully)

II. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn từ thích hợp nhất cho mỗi khoảng trống. Ghi A, B, C, hoặc D vào khung ANSWERS : (10đ)                   My Teacher

            My teacher, Miss White, is a young lady (1) _____ twenty-six. She is a nice lady. She loves her students (2) _____. She never (3) _____ angry with them. Miss White (4) _____ teaching her students. Sometimes she tells (5) ______ many interesting stories.I like to listen to her stories (6) ______ they all help us to learn some   (7) _____ lessons. Sometimes she takes us out (8) ______ a picnic. Whenever she takes us out, she tries to teach us something (9) _____. It is my dream that (10) _____ I grow up, I can become a good teacher like her.

1.   A. of                                B. with                          C. from                         D. by

2.   A. very many                   B. very much               C. too                            D. so

3.   A. is                                 B. gets                         C. makes                      D. comes

4.   A. enjoy                           B. enjoying                  C. enjoys                       D. to enjoy

5.   A. we                               B. they                         C. I                                D. us

6.   A. because                      B. when                        C. where                       D. why

7.   A. use                              B. useful                       C. using                        D. to use

8.    A. from                            B. by                            C. for                            D. of

9.    A. old                              B. new                          C. bad                          D. well

10. A. where                          B. why                          C. what                         D. when

III. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời các câu hỏi: (10đ)

            Lan’s classes all start at 8:00AM., so she gets up at 7:00. She eats a quick breakfast, and takes the bus to her school. She also has a job at the library. She works from Thursday to Saturday. She usually studies in the evening. She stays up late because of her homework. She usually goes to bed at 11:30, and on Sundays she sleeps until noon.

1. How does she go to school?

2. Where does she work?                         

3. How many days a week does she work? 

4. Does she go to bed early?               

5. Why does she stay up late?         

IV. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi ô trống. Ghi từ điền vào khung ANSWERS : (10đ)

            On school-days, Tom’s mother calls him at six. He gets up and goes to the  (1)__    . There he washeshis face and (2)   ___       his teeth. Then he gets (3)   __     and goes downstairs to have breakfast. Tom leaves home at about half past six with his school bag under his arm. He gets to school at a  (4)   ___     to seven and plays or talks with his friends (5)        ___     the bell rings.

V. Đặt câu hỏi dựa vào từ gạch chân: (20đ)

1.  My mother often walks to work. 

2.  I’d like a glass of lemon juice.   

3. I have English three times a week.  

4. I am waiting for my uncle at the station.      

5. We have Physics on Monday and Friday.  

6. Tom and Hoa can’t understand each other because their languages are different.

7.  My sister helps my mother with the housework.

8.  People often travel to Singapore by plane.  

 9. Yes. I have one brother and two sisters.

10. Mrs. Hoa’s children are playing soccer in the garden.

VI. Em hãy viết lại các câu sau với từ gợi ý, không thay đổi nghĩa của câu:  (20đ)         

1. How much is this hat?   ->  What...........?

2. How heavy is your sister?->  What ......................?/How much………….?

3. Nam isn’t tall and neither is his brother. -> Nam is short ........................................

4. This dictionary is more expensive than that one.-> That dictionary is

5. The film is very interesting. -> What .............................................................................!

6. There are eleven classrooms in our school. -> Our school ...........................................

7. No one in my class is taller than Peter. -> Peter is ….

8. His house is near his school. -> His house isn’t .......................................................

9. My brother learns English well. ->.  My brother is ...........................................................

10. The girl is beautiful. -> She ...................................................................................

 

 

TEST 29

 

Question I: Choose the best answer to fill in each blank.

1. It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s ........................... home.A. go B. to go C. going D. goes
2. Tuan and I ..................... badminton in the yard.A. playing B. is playing C. are playing D. am playing
3. This sign says “Stop!”. We ........................... go straight ahead.A. can B. don’t can C. must D. must not
4. They are going to New York ........................... plane.A. in B. by C. with D. on
5. Viet is ............................ something on his book.A. writing B. writting C. wrote D. writes
6. Are there ................... stores on your street?A. a B. an C. any D. the
7. My sister and I ..... television in the living - room now. A. am watchingB. are watching C. is watching D. watching
8. ........................... do you go to school? - I walk.A. How B. By what C. How many D. How by
9. “Does Nga play volleyball?” - “No, ........................”A. she not plays B. she don’t C. she isn’t D. she doesn’t
10. How many floors .......................... in your school?A. there are B. there has C. are there D. have there
Question II: Give the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets.
1. Every evening my father (watch) ............................. television.
2. We (not/ read) ............................. books after lunch.
3. Tom (be) ........................ my friend. He (play) ...................... sports everyday.
4. (your students/ play) ................................................. soccer every afternoon?
5. Where (your children/ be) ...................... ......? - They’re upstairs. They (play) .......................... video games.
6. What (you/ do) ................................... now? - I (unload) ........................... the vegetables.
7. (Nam/ work) .............................................. in the garden at the moment?
Question III: Fill en each blank with the suitable word.
Today is Sunday. ........................ (1) is fine and warm. Mr. Kien’s family are ....................(2) at home. They are working in the house now. Mr. Kien is cleaning the doors and windows. Nam is helping .................... (3). Mrs. Oanh and Hoa ..................... (4) in the kitchen. Mrs. Oanh is ....................... (5) the dishes. Hoa is cleaning the vegetables. They are cooking the lunch. They are going to ........................ (6) a good lunch together.
Mr. Kien’ family are not free today. They are busy ........................ (7) the housework, but they are very happy. They are going to finish the housework at half past eleven, then .........................(8) will have lunch. In the afternoon they are going to the park. In the ......................(9) Nam and Hoa are going to ................(10) all their exercises before going to bed. 
Question IV: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group. 
1. A. gray        B. face C. orange D. make     2. A. big B. time C. fine D. light

3. A. tall B. fat C. cat D. hat                          4. A. do B. brother C. two D. to
5. A. has B. name C. family D. lamp             6. A. no B. cold C. old D. doctor
7. A. son B. come C. home D. mother            8. A. be B. the C. he Vietnamese

9. A. live B. his C. dinner D. fine                   10. A. house B. our C. four D. about
Question V: Make the question for the underlined words or phrases.
1. .................................................. ..................................? - She walks to school every day.. 
2. .................................................. .................................?- The man in the car is our new teacher.
3. .................................................. .......................? - We are having bread and milk for breakfast.
4. .................................................. ............................? - My sister works in Sydney, Australia.
5. .................................................. .......................? - There are ten boys and nineteen girls in our class.
6. .................................................. ............................? - I’m in class 6A.
7................................................. ..............................? - My brother gets up at a quarter to six.
8. .................................................. ............................? - They are traveling to work by car.
9. .................................................. ............................? - There is a lake near our house.
10. .................................................. ............................? - Mr. Hoang works in the city.
Question VI: Find the mistake in the each sentence below and correct it.
1. Minh don’t work in a bank. .................................................. .......................................
2. We don’t live in a country. .................................................. .......................................
3. When this program finish? .................................................. .......................................
4. The bank doesn’t closes until 4.30. .................................................. ................................
5. They like watch TV. .................................................. .................................
6. Would you like go to the cinema tonight? .................................................. ......................
7. He usually doesn’t come home late. .................................................. .......................
8. He comes here with bicycle. .................................................. ....................................
9. Are you enjoy the party? .................................................. ...................................
10. Can you playing chess? .................................................. .................................
Question VII: Use the given words to make complete sentences.
1. Minh/ live/ brother/ apartment/ town................................................... .................................................. ..
2. Mrs. Lan/ and/ children/ travel/ London/ plane................................................... ........................................
3. There/ be/ any flowers/ your/ school/ yard?.................................................. .............................................
4. He/ not ride/ home/ but/ go/ taxi................................................... .................................................. ........
5. Sister/ have/ bike/ and/ cycle/ work/ everyday................................................... ........................................
Question VIII: Read the following passage and answer the questions below.
Linda is a vegetarian so she doesn’t eat meat. She doesn’t have a big breakfast every morning. She usually has a slide of bread and a glass of milk. She has lunch at the office at about 11.30. She has only rice with vegetables for lunch. At weekends she often goes to a Chinese restaurant because there is a lot of delicious food for vegetarians.
* Question:
1. Why doesn’t Linda eat meat?.................................................. .................................................. ...............
2. What does Linda usually have for breakfast?.................................................. .........................................
3. What does she have for lunch?.................................................. .................................................. ...........
4. Where does she have lunch?.................................................. .................................................. ............
5. Why does she often go to a Chinese restaurant at weekends?.................................................. ................

 

TEST 30

Question I: Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from

                    the others:

  1. A. chair                       B. watch                     C. chemistry                D. which
  2. A. visit                        B. season                     C. sausage                   D. museum
  3. A. wet                         B. better                      C. rest                          D. pretty
  4. A. parents                    B. start                        C. car                           D. park
  5. A. thirty                      B. three                       C. with                        D. teeth

 Question II: Choose from the four options given ( marked A,B,C or D ) ONE best

                       answer to complete each sentence below:

  1. Minh is in her room now. She ........... English.

A. learns                      B. to learn                    C. are learning            D. is learning

  1. ........ an awful day !

A. How                       B. What                       C. Which                     D. Where

  1.  My birthday is ........ the .......of November.

A. on / thirty   B. at / thirtieth C. in / thirty                D. on / thirtieth

  1.  What is the longest month of the year? ( number of letters)

 A. September B. December   C. November   D. January

  1.  My sister usually ........... to the movie theater.

 A. go                          B. to go                       C. goes                        D. going

  1.  I am very happy to see you again after a long summer holiday. ............

 A. I do, too                 B. So am I                   C. Neither am I           D. So do I

  1.  My father is looking .. the children.

A. of                            B. on                           C. for                           D. with

  1.  – Is Singapore rather crowded?

 – No, there are .........people in Hongkong.

 A. more                      B. a lot            C. less              D. fewer

  1.  He works in a factory. He is a ..........

 A. journalist   B. teacher                    C. worker                    D. farmer

  1.  I usually go to school .......bike, but today I am going to school .....foot.

A. by / by                    B. by / on                    C. on / by                    D. on / on

Question III. Fill in each blank with a suitable word to complete the passage.

            Greeting from Hanoi. Trung and I (16).......... staying in an interesting place. We are at the youth Activity Center. People (17).......... here every summer to learn about hobbies. I’m doing photo and tennis, and Trung is learning about computer. We (18).......... up at half past six every morning and do lessons (19).......... seven to half past eleven. We have (20).......... at twelve o’clock, and then there are more lessons. So it is (21)........... work. But I like it here. We’re (22)........... a good time. It’s a (23)........... past seven in the morning now, and we (24).......... sitting on the grass in the (25)........... of the center. The weather is nice.

Question IV. Supply the correct form of the word in brackets for each gap in the

                      following sentences.

26. In my (neighbor)................ there is a park and a museum.

27. What is the (high)............ of Mount Everest?

28. Vietnam has a lot of (beauty)..............places.

29. Lan is the (small) ...................of the three girls.

30. My brother is a (study)................student.

Question V. Read the passage and tick the true (T) or false (F) statements.

            Fishing is my favorite sport. I often fish for hours without catching anything. But this does not worry me. Some fishermen are unlucky. Instead of catching fish, they catch rubbish. I am even less lucky. I never catch anything – not even rubbish. I always go home with an empty bag. “You must give up fishing!” my friends say. It’s waste of time. But they don’t know one important thing: I don’t really like fishing. I only want to sit in a boat and doing nothing at all.

     31. The writer often has a good catch of fish.

            32. Some fishermen catch fish in stead of rubbish.

            33. He is a lucky fisherman.

            34. His friends want him to give up fishing.

            35. He really likes fishing.

Question VI. Each of the below sentences has four underlined words or phrases. One

           those is not correct. Identify it by circling one of the four choices (A, B, C or D).

            36. Of the two coats, the grey one is long than the other one.

                 A                  B                   C          D

            37. There are much students in my class

                            A      B         C             D

            38. Let’s playing computer games now.

                   A         B                 C               D

            39. Mr. Hien doesn’t lives in a house in the country.

                                     A       B                     C          D

            40. That’s my sister over there. She stands near the windows.

                    A                            B                  C              D

Question VII. Use the given words to write meaningful sentences.

            41. It / learn / difficult / math.

            42. anyone / your family / like / sweets?

            43. They / take / vegetables / market / the moment.

            44. You / drive / work / or / go / bus?

            45. Our apartment / have / four rooms / and seven floor.

Question VIII. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the

                         first one. Write the answers on your answer paper.

           46. Where do you live?

                  What is  ...........................................................................................

            47. The blue dress is cheaper than the red one.

                        The red dress is............................................................................

            48. Nam is taller than any students in my class.

                        Nam is the...................................................................................

            49. There are 500 students in my school.

                        My school..................................................................................

            50. How much is that hat?

How much does.........................................................................

 

 

 

 

help me! please 

 

7
7 tháng 1 2022

dài quá 

7 tháng 1 2022

má ơi xỉu dài dữ dzậy

7 tháng 1 2022

Tiếng Anh 

Sport has long been regarded as a magic medicine to keep the body healthy and the mind relaxing. It brings us a lot of great benefits that not everyone all knows. First, regular exercises help to have a healthy body. We become more and more flexible, muscles get more toned and at the same time volume of lungs is expanded, helps us circulate the trachea more easily. Second, exercises also help us to relax mind. For example, when you walk in the morning, you can watch the dawn on the city. How roman it is! We can connect with the nature, observe and feel the beauty of the flowers, the green trees, listen to the birds chirping. Last but not least, exercises also help us be closer to the other around. Most of the time on day everyone is busy with work, has very little time for exchange with other. This is a good opportunity to meet and make friends, strengthen neighborhood relationships. With these previous benefits, sports have played a very important role in one’s life. Let’s take up one of the sports to keep our body healthy and relaxed.

Tiếng Việt 

Thể thao từ lâu đã được coi là một thứ thần dược giúp cho cơ thể khỏe mạnh và tâm hồn thư thái. Nó mang đến cho chúng ta những lợi ích vô cùng to lớn mà không phải ai cũng đều biết đến. Đầu tiên, tập thể dục đều đặn sẽ giúp ta có một cơ thể khỏe mạnh. Chúng ta ngày càng dẻo dai, các cơ bắp ngày một trở nên săn chắc, đồng thời thể tích lá phổi được mở rộng giúp ta lưu thông khí quản dễ dàng hơn. Thứ hai, tập thể dục còn giúp cho chúng ta thư thái. Ví dụ, khi đi bộ vào buổi sáng, ta có thể ngắm nhìn bình minh lên trên thành phố, thật là thơ mộng làm sao. Ta hòa mình giao cảm với thiên nhiên, quan sát và cảm nhận vẻ đẹp của những nhành hoa, cái cây bên đường, lắng nghe tiếng chim ríu rít. Cuối cùng nhưng chưa phải tất cả, tập thể dục giúp ta gần gũi với những người xung quanh. Hầu hết thời gian trong ngày của mọi người đều bận rộn với công việc, rất hiếm thời gian giao lưu. Đây là cơ hội tốt để gặp gỡ và kết bạn, tăng cường mối quan hệ hàng xóm láng giềng. Với những lợi ích trên, thể thao đóng một vai trò vô cùng quan trọng trong cuộc sống của mỗi người. Mỗi chúng ta hãy chăm tập thể thao hơn để rèn luyện cơ thể luôn khỏe mạnh và tâm hồn thư thái.

7 tháng 1 2022

Where are you from?   A.I'm Viet Nam 

What's thit?    A.lt's a chair   

Who's She?   C.She's sister

7 tháng 1 2022

Where are you from?          A.I'm Viet Nam                     B.OK                       C.I'm seven

What's thit?                        A.lt's a chair                          B.Pink                     C.i white

Who's She?                       A.He's my father                  B.rock                      C.She's sister

hok tốt

####

7 tháng 1 2022

Mọi người đều có sở thích riêng của họ. Và sở thích của tôi là vẽ. Tôi nghĩ cuộc sống của tôi sẽ thật tẻ nhạt nếu không có bức tranh. Tôi bắt đầu học vẽ khi mới 7 tuổi. Người nhận ra tài năng hội họa của tôi là cha tôi. Bố đã gửi tôi đến các lớp học vẽ ngay sau đó. Với năng khiếu bẩm sinh và sớm được tiếp xúc với hội họa nên năng khiếu vẽ của em hơn hẳn các bạn cùng trang lứa. Tôi sẽ vẽ lại những điều thú vị mà tôi gặp hàng ngày. Khi có thời gian, tôi sẽ vẽ chân dung những người tôi yêu quý và tặng họ. Mọi người đều yêu thích những bức tranh tôi vẽ. Vẽ tranh giúp tôi cảm thấy mất hứng thú và mệt mỏi. Tôi có thể ngồi cả ngày trong phòng và vẽ bất cứ thứ gì mình muốn. Vẽ tranh giúp tôi giải tỏa căng thẳng và yêu đời hơn. Nhìn thấy những màu sắc rực rỡ khác nhau khiến tôi cảm thấy như cuộc sống của tôi ngập tràn màu sắc. Hội họa là một phần của tôi. Tôi nghĩ tôi sẽ theo đuổi nó cho đến cùng.

7 tháng 1 2022

Mọi người đều có sở thích riêng của họ. Và sở thích của tôi là vẽ. Tôi nghĩ cuộc sống của tôi sẽ thật tẻ nhạt nếu không có bức tranh. Tôi bắt đầu học vẽ khi mới 7 tuổi. Người nhận ra tài năng hội họa của tôi là cha tôi. Bố đã gửi tôi đến các lớp học vẽ ngay sau đó. Với năng khiếu bẩm sinh và sớm được tiếp xúc với hội họa nên năng khiếu vẽ của em hơn hẳn các bạn cùng trang lứa. Tôi sẽ vẽ lại những điều thú vị mà tôi gặp hàng ngày. Khi có thời gian, tôi sẽ vẽ chân dung những người tôi yêu quý và tặng họ. Mọi người đều yêu thích những bức tranh tôi vẽ. Vẽ tranh giúp tôi cảm thấy mất hứng thú và mệt mỏi. Tôi có thể ngồi cả ngày trong phòng và vẽ bất cứ thứ gì mình muốn. Vẽ tranh giúp tôi giải tỏa căng thẳng và yêu đời hơn. Nhìn thấy những màu sắc rực rỡ khác nhau khiến tôi cảm thấy như cuộc sống của tôi ngập tràn màu sắc. Hội họa là một phần của tôi. Tôi nghĩ tôi sẽ theo đuổi nó cho đến cùng.

7 tháng 1 2022

đáp án 3000,279

7 tháng 1 2022

easy

1000, 123 + 2000,156 = 3000, 279

Choose the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions.1. A. breadwinner         B. heavy                   C. break              D. bread2. A. skeleton               B. nerve                   C. preparation...
Đọc tiếp

Choose the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions.

1. A. breadwinner         B. heavy                   C. break              D. bread

2. A. skeleton               B. nerve                   C. preparation      D. intestine

3. A. fortunate              B. considerate          C. nominate          D. passionate

4. A. movement            B. president              C. extent              D. instrument

 

Choose the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress in each of the following questions.

5. A. alternative       B. acupuncture        C. culturally          D. respiratory

6. A. stimulate         B. evidence             C. pyramid            D. digestive

7. A. advantage       B. minority              C. cooperate          D. education

8. A. effective          B. difficult               C. mountainous      D. organize

 

5
7 tháng 1 2022

1. C

2. B

3. C

4. C

5.A

6. D

7. D

8. A

HT

Choose the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions.

1. A. breadwinner         B. heavy                   C. break              D. bread

2. A. skeleton               B. nerve                   C. preparation      D. intestine

3. A. fortunate              B. considerate          C. nominate          D. passionate

4. A. movement            B. president              C. extent              D. instrument

Choose the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress in each of the following questions.

5. A. alternative       B. acupuncture        C. culturally          D. respiratory

6. A. stimulate         B. evidence             C. pyramid            D. digestive

7. A. advantage       B. minority              C. cooperate          D. education

8. A. effective          B. difficult               C. mountainous      D. organize

7 tháng 1 2022

Chúng ta học theo kiểu anh anh hay anh mĩ đều được nha , đó là do bạn lựa chọn học theo kiểu nào thôi . ( ^-^ )

@Mia

7 tháng 1 2022

thực ra chúng ta đang học UK-UK chứ ko phải UK-US :)))